Giulia (2021) - Automotive ALFA ROMEO - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Giulia (2021) ALFA ROMEO

ALFA ROMEO

GIULIA

2021 OWNER'S MANUAL

This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-844-253-2872 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner's Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and others, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other productive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your parts frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.

We have written this Owner's Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.

Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.

You are advised to read through the Owner's Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.

This Owner's Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.

For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact:

Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:

P.O. Box 21-8004 Auburn Hills, MI

48321-8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA

(1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada):

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] (English)

Phone: [phone] (French)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling

Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see ➕ page 263

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric parking brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on potential fire hazards such as: grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, with the risk of gradually draining the battery, contact an authorized Alfa Romeo dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

Accessories Purchased By The Owner

WARNING!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact an authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicle's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.

NOTE:

Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.).

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices

FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.

NOTE:

Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB [Citizen Band] radios, amateur radio, etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally.

Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.

CAUTION!

☐ The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.
☐ If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.

Operating Instructions

Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate.

The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the Index at the end of this manual.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page.

Warnings And Cautions

While reading this Owner's Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.

Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety:

Vehicle Safety:

NOTE:

This Owner's Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific markets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.

The data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

Symbols Key

NOTE:	A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCEARROW	Follow this reference for additional information on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTEX	Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic.

Symbols

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

	READ THE OWNER'S MANUAL		DO NOT TOUCH WITH HANDS		IT CAN START AUTOMATICALLY ALSO WITH ENGINE OFF
	PROTECT YOUR EYES		DO NOT OPEN THE CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT		DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PRESSURE GAS
	KEEP CHILDREN AT A DISTANCE		BURSTING		MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS OF YOUR BODY AND CLOTHES AWAY
	DO NOT APPROACH FLAMES		CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VO

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

SAFETY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

Vertical sequence of red icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, navigation, and inspection.

DEAR CUSTOMER

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling....2

Starting The Engine....2

Parking On Flammable Material .....2

Respecting The Environment ...... 2

Electrical Accessories ......2

Scheduled Servicing 2

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS

Accessories Purchased By The Owner.....3

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices .... 3

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ... 4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Operating Instructions ....5

Warnings And Cautions....5

Symbols Key 6

Symbols 6

Symbol Glossary

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS....16

Key Fob 16

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM ......18

IGNITION SWITCH....19

Keyless Push Button Ignition .....19

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .....20

How To Use Remote Start ....20

To Exit Remote Start Mode 21

Remote Start Comfort Systems —

If Equipped.... 21

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED.... 21

To Arm The System...... 21

To Disarm The System 21

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection —

If Equipped.... 22

DOORS....22

Power Door Locks.... 22

Locking The Doors With A Depleted Battery.... 23

Passive Entry System 24

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped 26

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.... 26

STEERING WHEEL...... 26

Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column....26

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.... 27

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —

IF EQUIPPED 28

Programming The Memory Feature ..... 28

Memory Position Recall 28

SEATS 29

Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped.... 29

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...... 30

Power Adjustment (Front Seats)...... 32

Heated Seats — If Equipped 33

Head Restraints 35

MIRRORS.... 36

Automatic Dimming Mirror.... 36

Vanity Mirror ....37

Outside Power Mirrors 37

Power Folding Outside Mirrors......38

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —

If Equipped ....38

Heated Mirrors 38

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER

(HOMELINK®) 38

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ....39

Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels....39

Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ....39

Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener....39

Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous Device....40

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button 40

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming....41

EXTERIOR LIGHTS 42

Headlight Switch 42

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ......42

High Beam Headlights 42

Automatic Headlights ....42

Flash-To-Pass ....43 Automatic High Beam Headlights —

If Equipped 43

Parking Lights....43

Headlight Off Delay 43

Rear Fog Light 44

Adaptive Frontlight System

(AFS Function) — If Equipped ...... 44

Turn Signals 44

Lane Change Assist 44

Static Bending Light Function (SBL) —

If Equipped 44

INTERIOR LIGHTS 44

Front Map Reading Lights....45

Interior Ambient Lighting 45

Rear Overhead Light 46

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control ..... 46

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS....46

Windshield Wiper Operation .....47

Rain Sensing Wipers......47

CLIMATE CONTROL 48

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate

Control System 49

INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT....55

Glove Compartment 55

Center Console 56

Power Outlet 56

Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray —

If Equipped 57

Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ... 57

POWER WINDOWS ....58

Power Window Controls.... 58

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....60

Power Sunroof.... 60

Opening And Closing The Sunroof .....60

Venting Sunroof 61

Sun Shade Operation 61

Pinch Protect Feature.... 61

Re-Initialization Procedure.... 61

Sunroof Maintenance.... 61

HOOD....62

Opening......62

Closing......62

TRUNK 63

Opening......63

Closing...... 64

Trunk Initialization.... 64

Trunk Specifications 64

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

SYSTEMS.... 65

Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front

Spoiler 65

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT

PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES...... 66

Instrument Cluster 66

Tachometer.... 67

Engine Oil Temperature Gauge 67

Fuel Level Gauge.... 68

Speedometer 68

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.... 68

Instrument Cluster Display

Description...... 68

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster

Display....68

Reconfigurable Display Items.... 68

Customer Programmable Settings ..... 72

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 73

Red Warning Lights 73

Amber Warning Lights.... 75

Green Indicator Lights 77

Blue Indicator Lights....77

Red Symbols....78

Amber Symbols 79

Green Symbols 83

Blue Symbols....83

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM .....84

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity......84

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 85

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE....86

Starting Procedure....86

Remote Starting System......86

Cold Weather Operation 87

Extended Park Starting....87

If Engine Fails To Start......88

After Starting — Warming Up The

Engine 88

Stopping The Engine....88

Turbocharger Cool Down 88

Alfa DNA System ....99 Driving Modes ....99

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED 102

STOP/START SYSTEM 102

Stop/Start System 102

Operating Mode ....102

System Manual Activation/ Deactivation ....103

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop ....103

Engine Restarting Conditions .....103

Safety Functions ....103

Irregular Operation ....104

Vehicle Inactivity 104

SPEED LIMITER 104

Description 104

Activation....104

Speed Limit Programming.....105

Exceeding The Programmed Speed ...105

Programmed Speed Icon Flashing .....105

Deactivation ....105

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS......105

Cruise Control – If Equipped ...... 105

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped....107

Limited System Availability/Operation 118

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED....119

To Activate/Deactivate.... 119

Operation 120

Indications On The Display 121

System Status.... 121

Limited System Availability/Operation 122

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......123

To Activate/Deactivate.... 123

Indications On The Display 123

INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC)

SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED ......124

To Activate/Deactivate.... 124

Indications On The Display 124

Acceptance/Rejection Of The Suggested Speed 125

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....125

ParkSense Sensors 126

ParkSense Display.... 126

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.... 127

ParkSense Warning Display 127

ParkSense System Usage Precautions .... 128

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...... 128

Lane Departure Warning Operation.... 128

Turning Lane Departure Warning On Or Off.... 129

Lane Departure Warning Message .... 129 Changing Lane Departure Warning

Status.... 130

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED 130

Turning Lane Keeping Assist On Or Off.... 131

Lane Keeping Assist Warning Message 131

REAR BACK UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC

GRIDLINES.... 134

REFUELING THE VEHICLE 135

Refueling The Vehicle .... 135 Refueling Procedure .... 135

VEHICLE LOADING 136

Certification Label...... 136

TRAILER TOWING 138

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING 138

Saving Fuel 138

Driving Style.... 138

Conditions Of Use.... 138

Transporting Passengers.... 139

Transporting Animals.... 139

Exhaust Gas.... 139

Performance – Quadrifoglio...... 139

SAFETY

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS 141

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....141

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) — If Equipped ....142

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) .....142

Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If Equipped ....142

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).....142

Hill Start Assist (HSA)....143

Panic Brake Assist (PBA)....143

Traction Control System (TCS) .....144

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS...... 144

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System — If Equipped ....145

Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) System —

If Equipped 147

Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System — If Equipped ....150

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System......151

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....156

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..... 159

Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....159

Important Safety Precautions ......159

Seat Belt Systems 159

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)....165

Child Restraints....174

SAFETY TIPS 187

Transporting Passengers 187

Transporting Pets 187

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 187

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 188

Exhaust Gas.... 189

Carbon Monoxide Warnings...... 189

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .....190

SOS - EMERGENCY CALL ....190

TIRE SERVICE KIT 194

Description....194

Inflation Procedure.... 195

Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure.... 197

Sealant Cartridge Replacement ..... 197

JUMP STARTING ....198

Remote Battery Connection Posts ..... 198

Jump Starting.... 199

Bump Starting 200

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....200

MANUAL PARK RELEASE....201

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......201

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models..... 202

All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models...... 202

TOW EYES....202

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ......203

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ......203

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING.... 204

Periodic Checks.... 204

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle...... 204

Maintenance Plan - 2.0L Engine ..... 205

Maintenance Plan - 2.9L Engine ..... 208

ENGINE COMPARTMENT.... 211

Checking Levels - 2.0L Engine ...... 211

Checking Levels - 2.9L Engine ..... 212

Engine Oil 213

Engine Coolant 214

Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Headlights.... 214

Brake Fluid 214

Automatic Transmission Activation System Oil.... 214

Useful Advice For Extending

The Life Of Your Battery.... 214

Battery 215

Pressure Washing 215

BATTERY RECHARGING.... 215

Important Notes 215

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE 217

Engine Oil 217

Engine Oil Filter 217

Engine Air Cleaner.... 217

Air Conditioning System Maintenance 217

Lubricating Moving Parts Of

The Bodywork.... 218

Windshield Wiper 218

Exhaust System 220

Engine Cooling System......220

Braking System......222

Automatic Transmission....222

Replacing The Battery 223

FUSES 223

BULB REPLACEMENT 228

TIRES....234

Tire Safety Information 234

Tires – General Information ......241

Spare Tires – If Equipped .....246

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care 246

Tire Types 247

Snow Traction Devices 248

Tire Rotation Recommendations.....249

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..... 250

Treadwear 250

Traction Grades 250

Temperature Grades 250

STORING THE VEHICLE 250

BODYWORK 252

Protection Against Atmospheric

Agents....252

Corrosion Warranty....252

Preserving The Bodywork......252

INTERIORS 253

Seats And Fabric Parts 253

Leather Seats....254

Plastic And Coated Parts....254

Alcantara Parts — If Equipped......254

Genuine Leather Surfaces —

If Equipped 254

Carbon Fiber Parts....254

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)......255

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Plate 255

ENGINE....256

POWER SUPPLY 257

TRANSMISSION....258

BRAKES 258

SUSPENSION....259

STEERING SYSTEM....259

DIMENSIONS - 2.0L ENGINE ......260

DIMENSIONS - 2.9L Engine ......261

WEIGHTS - 2.0L ENGINE....262

WEIGHTS - 2.9L ENGINE....262

FUEL REQUIREMENTS ......263

Reformulated Gasoline 263

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends 263

CNG And LP Fuel System

Modifications 263

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.... 263

Materials Added To Fuel 264

Fuel System Cautions 264

FLUID CAPACITIES....265

2.0L Engine.... 265

2.9L V6 Engine 266

ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.....267

CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....268

PERFORMANCE - 2.0L ENGINE ......269

PERFORMANCE - 2.9L ENGINE ......269

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE

FOR YOUR VEHICLE 270

Prepare For The Appointment 270

Prepare A List 270

Be Reasonable With Requests...... 270

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 270

Alfa Romeo Customer Center...... 270

Alfa Romeo Customer Care

(Canada) 270

Customer Assistance For The Hearing

Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)...... 271

Service Contract 271

WARRANTY INFORMATION 272

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 272

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C. 272

In Canada 272

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 272

General Information.... 273

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol ➔ page 68.

Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light → page 73

Brake Warning Light → page 73

Oil Temperature Warning Light → page 74

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light → page 75

Amber Warning Lights

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ⇒ page 75

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped → page 75

Amber Warning Lights

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped page 75

Tire Pressure Low Warning Light page 75

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light page 76

Rear Fog Lights ↳ page 76

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) page 77

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System page 77

Fuel Reserve/Limited Range → page 77

Green Indicator Lights

Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped page 77

Green Indicator Lights

Left Turn Signal Indicator Light → page 77

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light → page 77

Right Turn Signal Indicator Light → page 77

Blue Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped → page 77

Red Symbols

Alfa Steering Torque (AST) Failure page 78

Alternator Failure page 78

Automatic Transmission Failure page 78

Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System Activation page 78

Red Symbols
	Door Open page 78
	Power Steering Failure page 78
	Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light page 78
	Engine Coolant Temperature Too High page 78
	Hood Cap Not Properly Shut page 79
	Insufficient Engine Oil Level page 79
	Low Engine Oil Pressure page 79
	Trunk Lid Not Properly Shut page 79
Amber Symbols
	Engine Immobilizer Failure/ Break-In Attempt page 79

Amber Symbols

Amber Symbols
	Fuel Cut-Off Indicator Light ↘ page 79
	Park Sensors System Failure ↘ page 79
	Engine Oil Change Required— If Equipped ↘ page 80
	Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure ↘ page 80
	Engine Oil Level Sensor Failure ↘ page 80
	Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System Failure — If Equipped ↘ page 80
	Stop/Start System Failure ↘ page 80
	Rain Sensor Failure ↘ page 80
	Dusk Sensor Failure ↘ page 80

Amber Symbols
	Blind Spot Monitoring System Failure —If Equipped ➔ page 80
	Fuel Level Sensor Failure ➔ page 80
	Exterior Lights Failure ➔ page 81
	Keyless System Failure ➔ page 81
	Fuel Cut-Off System Failure ➔ page 81
	Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System Failure —If Equipped ➔ page 81
	Automatic High Beam Headlights Failure —If Equipped ➔ page 81
	Automatic Transmission Fluid Overheating ➔ page 81
	Audio System Failure ➔ page 81

Amber Symbols

Speed Limiter System Failure

page 81

Loose Fuel Filler Cap

page 81

Electric Park Brake Failure

page 81

Low Coolant Level —

If Equipped

page 82

Service Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) System

page 82

Wear On Brake Pads

page 82

Dynamic Drive Control

System Failure

page 82

ndshield Wiper Failure

page 82

Generic Indication

page 82

All Wheel Drive Failure

page 82

Amber Symbols

Temporary All Wheel Drive

Failure — If Equipped

page 82

ABS Activation

page 82

Adaptive Front Lighting

System Failure

page 82

Soft Suspension Calibration

Insertion — If Equipped

page 82

Shock Absorbers Failure

page 82

Windshield Washer Liquid

Level

page 82

Wear ON Carbon Ceramic

Material (CCM) Brake Discs

- If Equipped

page 83

Driver Attention Assist (DAA)

System Failure

page 83

Highway Assist System

(HAS)/Traffic Jam Assist

(TJA) System Failure

page 83

Green Symbols

Headlights

page 83

Automatic Headlights

page 83

Stop/Start Operation

page 83

Cruise Control Activated

page 83

Adaptive Cruise Control

System — If Equipped

page 83

Blue Indicator Lights

Automatic High Beam

Headlights — If Equipped

page 83

High Beam Headlights

page 83

In this section, you will find important information to help you become familiar with the features needed to operate your vehicle, and how they function.

KEYS

Key Fob

Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote trunk operation. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored inside the key fob.

NOTE:

☐ The key fob's wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance.

☐ With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.

Close-up of a white automotive parking door key with control buttons and 'PANIC' branding (no readable text beyond branding)

Key Fob

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow → page 273.

To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door, or twice within five seconds to unlock all the doors and the trunk lid. To lock all the doors and the trunk lid, push the lock button once. If the trunk lid is open when the lock button is pushed, the trunk lid will lock when it is closed.

The current unlock setting can be changed through the radio system menu, so that the system unlocks:

☐ All doors on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
☐ The driver door on the first push of the key fob unlock button.

When the doors are locked/unlocked, the turn signals will flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.

NOTE:

If one or more doors are open when the lock button is pushed, or the trunk lid is open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.

Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/unlocking the doors and activation of the courtesy light upon unlocking the doors can be activated or deactivated through the radio system. For further information, refer to the Information and Entertainment System

Owner's Manual Supplement.

Trunk Lid Opening

Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside In An Emergency

If the battery is discharged or the key fob is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the doors from the outside by inserting the blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency key as follows.

☐ Lock — Turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise)
☐ Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left (counter clockwise)

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

□ Customers are recommended to use a battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket coin battery dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery dimensions.
☐ Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
☐ Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

To replace the battery, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and extract the cover pulling downwards.

Close-up of a silver remote control device with black arrows indicating directional movement (no text or symbols)

Key Fob Cover Removal

1. Remove the emergency key from its housing.

3D rendering of a car internal component with a red tool inserted, showing no text or symbols

Removing Emergency Key

1. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise.

3D rendering of a car interior with a red circular component and black arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Removing Battery Plug

1. Remove the battery from its slot and replace it with a new one. When replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3D rendered mechanical component with a red circular center (no text or symbols visible)

Battery Location

Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key fob.

CAUTION!

The battery replacement operation must be done with care, in order not to damage the electronic key.

Programming And Requesting Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

☐ Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
☐ Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

WARNING!

□ Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
□ Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed page 273.

NOTE:

□ When having the Engine Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
☐ For Quadrifoglio models, if you need a replacement key fob, contact an authorized dealer.

The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Engine Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

NOTE:

A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key → page 273.

IGNITION SWITCH

Keyless Push Button Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.

The START/STOP ignition button has several operating modes. These modes are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a red 'START STOP' button and control buttons (no readable text or symbols beyond the button)

START/STOP Ignition Button

The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:

OFF

□ The engine is stopped
□ Steering is locked
☐ Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available

ACC

□ Engine is not started
☐ Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power windows)

ON/RUN

☐ The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal)
☐ All the electrical devices are available (e.g. climate controls, etc.)

If the ignition switch does not change the mode by pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Proceed as follows:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the indicated spot in the bottom of the center console, positioning the key fob as shown in the following image, while pushing the START/STOP ignition button to start the ignition.

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with a red indicator light (no text or symbols visible)

Key Fob Placement Location

NOTE:

☐ For more information on proper engine starting procedures, see ➕ page 86.
☐ With the keyless ignition in the ACC position if 30 minutes pass with the gear selector in PARK and the engine off, the ignition will automatically reset to the OFF position.
☐ When opening the driver's door with the ignition in the ACC position (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message will display "Ignition Or Accessory On" in the cluster → page 273.

WARNING!

□ When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
□ Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
☐ Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security.

NOTE:

Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range → page 273.

WARNING!

☐ Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
□ Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

How To Use Remote Start

Push the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.

NOTE:

☐ With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes.
☐ Remote Start can only be used twice.
☐ If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
☐ The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.

☐ For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
☐ The ignition must be placed in the ACC position before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start:
□ Gear selector in PARK
□ Doors closed
□ Hood closed
□ Trunk closed
□ Hazard switch off
□ Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
□ Battery at an acceptable charge level
□ PANIC button not pushed
□ System not disabled from previous remote start event
□ Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
□ Ignition in OFF position
□ Fuel level meets minimum requirement
□ Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
□ Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated

To Exit Remote Start Mode

To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system, either push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button while pressing the brake pedal.

The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with another push and release of the Remote Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and front heated seat features will automatically activate when ambient temperature is less than 39^ F ( 4^ C). These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start.

NOTE:

This feature can be activated through the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors, hood, trunk, and the keyless push button ignition for unauthorized operation. It also monitors movement inside the passenger compartment (volumetric protection — if equipped), cutting of battery cables, and unexpected lifting/tilting of the vehicle (anti-lift protection — if equipped).

While the Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk release are disabled.

If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible and visible signals:

□ The horn will pulse
☐ The turn signals will flash
☐ The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash

NOTE:

The Vehicle Security system is activated by the Engine Immobilizer system, which is automatically activated when you get out of the vehicle with the key fob and lock the doors.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:

1. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

- Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

- Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone → page 24.

- Push the lock button on the key fob.

1. If any doors (or trunk lid) are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

□ Push the unlock button on the key fob.
☐ Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door ➤ page 24.
□ Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the system.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and charts.

NOTE:

☐ The driver's door key cylinder and trunk button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder when the system is armed will sound the alarm when the door is opened.
☐ When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.

NOTE:

The alarm does not disarm when the doors are unlocked by inserting the blade of the emergency key (found inside the key fob) into the door handle lock cylinder.

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped

To ensure the correct operation of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, completely close the side windows.

To disable the function, push the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button before activating the alarm.

When the function is disabled, the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button flashes for several seconds.

Top-down view of a car interior with no visible text or symbols

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button

Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection must be repeated each time the instrument panel is switched off.

DOORS

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches are located on each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and red accent panel (no visible text or symbols)

Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

WARNING!

☐ Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
☐ For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
□ Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking The Doors With A Depleted Battery

Proceed as follows to lock the doors if the vehicle battery is depleted.

Rear Doors And Passenger Door

1. With the doors unlocked insert the emergency key from the key fob or a flat bladed screwdriver into the door lock manual release lock cylinder.

Close-up of a metallic door handle with a red circular indicator and four circular buttons (no text or symbols visible)

Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder

1. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clockwise for the right door locks or counterclockwise for the left door locks.
2. Remove the key/screwdriver from the manual release lock.

Proceed in one of the following ways to realign the door lock device (only when the battery charge has been restored):

□ Push the lock button on the key fob
☐ Push the unlock button on the door panel
□ Unlock the driver's door lock cylinder with the emergency key
□ Operate the internal door handle

NOTE:

For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are engaged, and the previously described locking procedure is carried out, operating the internal handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only realign the lock release device. To open the door, the outside handle must be used. The door central locking/unlocking buttons are not deactivated when the emergency lock is engaged.

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency response, and search

Passive Entry System

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's key fob. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) and trunk lid without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

□ Passive Entry may be programmed on/of through the radio screen. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for Passive Entry settings.
☐ The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
☐ If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
☐ If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.

To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob close to the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver's door handle will unlock the driver door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all doors and the trunk lid automatically.

Close-up of a car's door with red buttons and a magnified inset showing a hand holding a small red pill (no text or symbols visible)

Passive Entry Door Handle

NOTE:

☐ If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. You can select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" through the radio screen. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for Passive Entry settings.

☐ All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a red arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Switch (Vehicles With Passive Entry)

Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected close to the outside of the vehicle.

If the Passive Entry function is disabled through the radio screen, the protections to avoid accidentally leaving the key fob inside the vehicle are deactivated.

To Lock The Vehicle's Doors And Trunk Lid

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs close to either front door handle, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.

Close-up of a car's interior showing a red pill and a magnified view of the eye (no text or symbols visible)

Passive Entry Lock Button

NOTE:

DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Exterior view of a car with a hand holding a phone and a prohibition symbol (no text or numbers present)

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:

□ After pushing the Passive Entry lock button, wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
☐ The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted.
☐ The vehicle doors and trunk lid can also be locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob or on the interior door lock.

To Unlock/Enter The Trunk

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs close to the trunk, push the trunk lid release button.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a red arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Trunk Lid Release Button

NOTE:

☐ If the key fob is left inside of the trunk, and an attempt is made to close it from outside, the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the key fob detected inside the vehicle, the trunk lid will unlock again and the lights will flash twice.
☐ Before driving, make sure the trunk lid closed correctly.

To Lock The Trunk

With a valid Passive Entry key fob close to the vehicle, push the Passive Entry trunk lid button, which is located next to the exterior trunk lid release button. All doors and the trunk lid will lock. Door locking will activate the alarm as well.

NOTE:

The trunk lid may still be locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob, pushing a Passive Entry lock button on the front door handles, or pushing the lock button on the interior door panel of the vehicle ↩ page 273.

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and safety-related functions, including car, camera, vehicle, and search.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled through the radio screen. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

Close-up of a metallic door with multiple switches and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Child Safety Lock Positions

NOTE:

☐ When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
□ After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the unlocked position.
□ After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the locked position.
☐ For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).

NOTE:

Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left inside.

STEERING WHEEL

Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

1 A B

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Steering Wheel Adjustment

1 - Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
A - Open
B - Closed

WARNING!

☐ Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
☐ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g. permanently fixed covers of any type or material) which could interfere with the capacitive hand detection sensor on the steering wheel of the Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA), Lane Keeping Assist (LKA), Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) or Highway Assist (HAS) systems (if equipped).

To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping control handle down to the open position. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the tilt/telescoping control handle to the closed position.

WARNING!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance. Doing so could void the New Vehicle Limited Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and also result in the vehicle not meeting type-approval requirements.

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and charts.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.

NOTE:

Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco Racing Seats will not be equipped with the heated steering wheel feature.

The heated steering wheel button is located on the instrument panel.

☐ Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.
☐ Push the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off.

When the function is enabled, the indicator on the button will illuminate.

Interior view of a car climate control panel with three fans and a red indicator (no text or symbols visible)

M0313000034US

Heated Steering Wheel Button

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

For information on use with the Remote Start system, see ↩ page 21.

WARNING!

□ Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
☐ Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to store up to three different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile saves desired position settings for the following features:

□ Driver seat
□ Side mirrors

The memory setting switch is located on the outboard side of the driver's seat. The switch consists of three buttons, one for each memory profile.

Technical diagram of a car door panel with numbered annotations pointing to red pins on the lock and side panels.

Seatback Width Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons
5 – Driver Memory Settings Buttons

Programming The Memory Feature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the ACC position (do not start the engine), and make sure the driver's door is closed.

NOTE:

A memory profile can also be set for three minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences, driver's seat and mirror positions.
3. Push and hold the memory button you want to program for 1.5 seconds.

NOTE:

When a new profile as been set, the previously set profile for that button will be overwritten.

Memory Position Recall

To recall a previously set position, push and release the memory profile button assigned to the desired positions.

NOTE:

Memory position recall can be done for approximately three minutes after the doors have been opened, and for approximately one minute after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

☐ It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
☐ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
☐ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in seat and using a seat belt properly.

Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped

Technical diagram of a car seat assembly with numbered components and red adjustment knobs

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 – Adjustment Lever
2 – Height Adjustment Button
3 – Recline Lever

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

Push the height adjustment button upward or downward to obtain your desired height.

Reclining The Seatback

To adjust the seatback, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!

□ Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
□ Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
☐ Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Row of grayscale icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories such as cars, vehicles, and equipment.

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)

WARNING!

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

The rear seats allow for three passengers.

NOTE:

The rear seat is designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The middle seat is of limited use. It is recommended that this seat only be used by a person who can use the backrest as a substitute for the head restraint.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Rear Seat

Split Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area.

Extending the right side of the trunk allows you to carry two passengers on the left part of the rear seat, while extending the left side allows you to carry one passenger.

Center Backrest Section Tilting

The center backrest can be tilted forward for a "Ski-Pass Through" feature from the trunk. Before tilting the backrest, make sure that the rear center seat belt is not fastened and that there are not any objects in the middle part of the cushion.

Using the release strap, release the center part of the backrest from its housing and tilt it using the head restraint.

Close-up of a car interior showing a knob and a red pushpin, with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Center Backrest Section Tilting

Center Backrest Section Repositioning

Using the head restraint, lift the center portion upwards, accompanying it during its movement, and lightly push to make sure that it is properly attached. Make sure that the armrest is properly attached by attempting to move it. If it is not attached, repeat the operation.

To Lower Rear Seat

Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.

NOTE:

Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily.

1. Completely lower the rear seat head restraints ↩ page 35.

2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede the movement of the backrest while tilting it.

3. From inside the luggage compartment, operate lever 1 to tilt the left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of the backrest: it will automatically tilt forward. If necessary, assist the backrest during the initial stage of tilting.

Top-down view of a car's rear engine bay with red sensors and numbered components (no text or symbols visible)

Seat Release Levers

1 – Left Side Seat Release Lever
2 – Right Side Seat Release Lever

NOTE:

You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

To Raise Rear Seat

Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

NOTE:

Make sure the seat belts are in the front of the seatback, and that they are not twisted, or trapped behind the seatbacks.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

Center Seatback Lowering

The center seatback can be folded forward for a "Ski-Pass Through" feature from the trunk. Before lowering the center seatback, make sure that the rear center seat belt is not fastened and that there are not any objects in the middle part of the cushion.

Using the release strap, pull upward to release the seatback and lower the center seatback forward.

Close-up of a car interior showing a knob and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Center Seatback Lowering

Center Seatback Repositioning

Using the head restraint, raise the center seatback, and lightly push to make sure that it is properly locked into place. If the seatback is not locked, repeat the operation.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

Row of grayscale icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including car, sun, helmet, car, and search.

Power Adjustment (Front Seats)

NOTE:

The seat layout may vary according to the vehicle options.

The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use these switches to move the driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to recline the seat-back.

Diagram showing car seat positioning with numbered annotations indicating directional movement and seating arrangement.

Power Seat Adjustment

1 – Seat Adjustment
2 – Recline Adjustment
3 - Lumbar Adjustment

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by using the seat adjustment switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, and the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down — If Equipped

The seat angle can be adjusted in four directions. Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Release the seat switch when the seat has reached the desired position.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward by using the recline switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!

□ Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
☐ Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
☐ Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Power Lumbar

The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped

Lift the adjustment lever and push the front of the cushion forward or rearward to extend the cushion by a few inches (centimeters).

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Seat Cushion Extension
6 - Adjustment Lever

Power Bolster Adjustment — If Equipped

Push the power bolster adjustment buttons to regulate the width of the backrest through the lateral padding.

Technical diagram of a car door panel with numbered annotations pointing to red markers on key components.

Seatback Width Adjustment

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons 5 — Driver Memory Settings Buttons

Easy Entry Function

The Easy Entry function is designed to move the driver side seat forward automatically by 2.36 inches (60 mm) to make it easier for the driver to get in and out of the car.

The movement is activated only if the seat is set to a driving position which is in front of the B-Pillar of the vehicle.

The function is associated with power driver seats for each of the three stored positions.

The Easy Entry function can be activated/deactivated through the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

WARNING!

□ Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
☐ Do not place anything on the seat or seat-back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

For information on use with the Remote Start system, see ➔ page 21.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including car, sun, helmet, gear, vehicle, and search.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

NOTE:

Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with Sparco Racing Seats will not be equipped with the heated seat feature.

A push of the heated seat buttons located on the instrument panel, near the climate controls, will select the heat levels in order of highest to lowest. A fourth push of the button will turn the heated seat off.

NOTE:

The heated seat function can also be activated through the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

You can select three heating levels:

☐ Maximum — three LED indicators illuminated on the buttons
□ Average — two LED indicators illuminated on the buttons
☐ Minimum — one LED indicator illuminated on the buttons

Close-up of a car air conditioning unit with three rotary gauges and red buttons (no visible text or symbols)

MO311000272US

Heated Seat Buttons

NOTE:

□ After selecting a heating level, heat will be felt within a few minutes.
☐ The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
☐ The “minimum” setting is automatically deactivated once a certain period of time has elapsed.

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

If equipped with rear heated seats, the controls can be found on the rear of the center console and will function the same as the front heated seat controls.

Close-up of a car air conditioner fan with two dials and a red control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Rear Heated Seat Buttons

NOTE:

To preserve the battery charge, this function cannot be activated when the engine is off.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

☐ A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
☐ ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
☐ Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped

Head restraints on Sparco Racing Seats (front seats) are non-adjustable and non-removable. The non-adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatbacks and are intended to help protect you and the passenger from neck injury. Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, on-road positions so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head.

Front Head Restraints

WARNING!

☐ All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
☐ Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

The front head restraints may be height-adjustable.

To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head restraint until it clicks into place.

To lower the head restraint, push in the adjustment button and lower the head restraint to the desired height while holding the button. Then, release the adjustment button.

NOTE:

To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if the head restraints are not in use, lower the head restraint all the way.

Rear Head Restraint Adjustment

WARNING!

☐ All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
☐ Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

The height of the outboard head restraints can be adjusted. The head restraint of the center seat can only be removed. The height cannot be adjusted.

For upward adjustment, pull up on the head restraint until it clicks into place.

For downward adjustment, push in the adjustment button and lower the head restraint while holding the button to the desired height.

3D rendered mechanical component with numbered callouts (1, 2), no visible text or symbols

Rear Head Restraint

1 - Adjustment Button
2 - Release Button

NOTE:

To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if the head restraints are not in use, lower the head restraint all the way.

Head Restraint Removal

To remove adjustable head restraints, proceed as follows:

1. Raise the head restraints to their maximum height.

2. Push the adjustment button and the release button at the side of the two supports.

3. Remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down both the adjustment button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes.
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropriate height for the passengers.

WARNING!

☐ A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
☐ ALL the head restraints MUST be re-installed in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

MIRRORS

Automatic Dimming Mirror

The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror.

Close-up of a white car rearview mirror with a red button on the side (no text or symbols visible)

Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

Vanity Mirror

On the driver and passenger sun visor, there is a light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when folded down.

Diagram of a car interior showing a red box labeled '1' with an arrow indicating rotation or movement, likely for vehicle safety or emergency control.

Sun Visor Mirror

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover

The courtesy light turns on automatically by lifting the cover.

Sun Visors

The sun visors are located at the sides of the interior rearview mirror. They can be adjusted forward and toward the side window.

To direct the visor toward the side window, detach the visor from the interior rearview mirror side hook and turn it towards the side window.

From this position, the sun visor can also be extended toward the rear of the vehicle for additional blockage of sunlight.

There are courtesy mirrors with lights on the back of the sun visors.

Interior view of a car showing a red and white object with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger Window

NOTE:

A rear facing child restraint system should never be fitted in the front passenger seat. Always comply with the instructions on the sun visor ▶ page 174.

Outside Power Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door trim panel.

To adjust the power mirrors, first select the desired mirror using the power mirror control.

To adjust the selected mirror, push the knob in the direction desired.

NOTE:

☐ Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
☐ The power mirrors can be adjusted with the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

A D B C 1

Power Mirror Control

1 - Power Mirror Control Knob

A - Left
B - Right
C — Power Folding Position
D - Neutral

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.

Power Folding Outside Mirrors

To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mirror function, make sure the power mirror control knob is in the neutral position, and move the knob to the power folding position. Move the knob again to return the mirrors to the driving position.

If the power mirror control knob is moved again during door mirror folding (from closed to open position and vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.

Automatic Power Folding Mirrors

The exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are locked). The mirrors return to the driving position when the vehicle is then unlocked.

If the door mirrors were folded using the power mirror control knob, they can only be returned to the driving position by moving the knob to the power folding position again.

NOTE:

The power folding operation can be enabled only when the vehicle speed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h).

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped

The outside mirrors will automatically dim for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

Heated Mirrors

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you push the rear defrost button in the climate controls.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®)

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to red-labeled buttons or parts

HomeLink® Buttons

1 - Homelink® Button 1
2 – Homelink® Button 2
3 - Homelink® Button 3
4 - Homelink® Indicator

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
☐ The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.

☐ To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
□ The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the center button ➤ page 273.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.

Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels

To erase the channels, follow this procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device

Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® buttons, determine whether the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.

Rolling Code Devices

To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly by manufacturer.

NOTE:

The "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button is not the button you normally use to operate the device.

Non-rolling Code Devices

Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a rolling code. These devices will also not have a "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.

Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener

To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, follow the steps below:

NOTE:

All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when programming additional buttons.

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program, while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this happens, release both buttons.

NOTE:

Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final steps.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and charts.

Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.

1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.

Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.

WARNING!

☐ Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
☐ Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.

Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous Device

Follow the procedure on programming HomeLink® to a garage door opener page 39. Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the programming process.

NOTE:

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been previously trained, without erasing all the channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to determine whether the new device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in "Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener" and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

The programming of transmitters in Canada/United States require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

□ If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
☐ To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/ device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, radios, vehicles, and charts.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and rear fog lights. In addition, there are buttons for the Park-Sense system and Engine Stop/Start page 86.

1 2 P 0 3×4 Q 5 4 3

Headlight Switch

1 - ParkSense Button
2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running Lights, Headlight Switch
3 – Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 - Rear Fog Light Button
5 – Engine Stop/Start Button

The instrument panel and the various controls on the dashboard will be illuminated when the exterior lights are turned on.

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity) come on automatically whenever the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and the headlight switch is turned to the position, and the dusk sensor detects sufficient external light.

If the turn signals are operated, the brightness of the corresponding Daytime Running Lights will be decreased as long as the turn signals are on.

The DRL can be activated/deactivated from the radio system, by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main MENU:

1. "Settings."
2. "Lights."
3. "Daytime Running Lights."

NOTE:

The Daytime Running Lights cannot be deactivated in Canadian markets.

High Beam Headlights

Push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The headlight switch must be turned to the (auto) or (on) position.

The High Beam Indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate when the high beams are on.

Close-up of a red car control knob with directional arrows and labels indicating left, right, and bottom directions.

Multifunction Lever

Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.

NOTE:

The function can only operate with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.

To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the (AUTO) position.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

Automatic High Beam Headlights — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlights system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

This function is enabled with the radio system, and can only be activated with the light switch turned to (auto).

If the high beam headlights are on, the blue icon/warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel.

When the speed is higher than 25 mph (40 km/h) and the function is active, the lights will turn off if the multifunction lever is pushed again.

When the speed is lower than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the function is active, the function switches the high beam headlights off.

If the high beam headlights are operated quickly again (pushing the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel), the warning light/icon will illuminate in the instrument panel, and the high beam headlights will turn on constantly until the speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded again, the automatic functioning is reactivated.

If the multifunction lever is pushed again with the Automatic High Beam Headlights activated, the Automatic High Beam Headlights function deactivates.

To deactivate the automatic headlight function, rotate the headlight switch to the position.

NOTE:

□ If the system recognizes heavy traffic areas, the automatic functions remain disabled independently of the vehicle's speed.
☐ The Automatic High Beam functionality may also be influenced by:

• Reflections on road signs
• Dim headlights from oncoming traffic
- Poor weather conditions

• Presence of dirt or other obstructions on the sensor
• Damage to the windshield

Parking Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the >position. All of the parking lights will turn on for eight minutes, and opening the door activates an audible warning.

To leave only the lights on one side (right/left) illuminated, move the multifunction lever (located on the left side of the steering wheel) to the side that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate.

To turn off the parking lights, rotate the head-light switch back to the O (off) position.

Headlight Off Delay

To assist when exiting the vehicle, the "Headlight Off Delay" feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning on the headlights or side lights, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.

The function can be activated from the radio system by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main menu:

1. "Settings."
2. "Lights."
3. "Headlight Off Delay."

Rear Fog Light

The rear fog lights may be operated as desired when visibility is poor due to fog. The rear fog light button is integrated with the headlight switch.

Push the button to turn the rear fog lights on/off.

The lights can be turned off by pushing the 0 button again or by turning the headlight switch to the O (off) position and holding it there for a few seconds.

NOTE:

The headlight switch must first be turned to the parking lights or headlights position before the rear fog light button can be pushed.

When the engine is stopped with the rear fog lights on, they will remain off the next time the engine is started.

Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS Function) — If Equipped

This is a system combined with Xenon headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if equipped) which directs the headlights horizontally, and continuously and automatically adapts them to the driving conditions around bends or when cornering.

The system directs the headlights to light up the road in the best way, taking into account the speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well as the speed at which the steering wheel is turned.

The adaptive lights are automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation.

The or turn signal will blink on the instrument panel.

Lane Change Assist

Lightly push the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash five times then automatically turn off. To turn off the flashing before the end of the cycle, move the lever in the opposite direction until the first click (about half way).

Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — If Equipped

The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) in order to better illuminate the street and increase the light angle while turning. This function is enabled by rotating the light switch to position (on) or (auto). The SBL LEDs activate when the speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) and the steering radius is below 0.3 miles (500 m).

This function can be activated/deactivated on the radio system by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main menu:

1. "Settings."
2. "Lights."
3. "Cornering Lights."

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Courtesy lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control is rotated to its farthest upward position. The glove compartment light turns on automatically when the glove compartment is opened and turn off when it is closed. The door courtesy lights illuminate when one of the front doors is opened, and turn off when it is closed. The trunk courtesy lights turn on automatically when the trunk is opened and turn off when it is closed. All of these lights turn on and off regardless of the ignition status.

Front Map Reading Lights

The front map/reading and overhead lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to different sections of the dashboard area.

Overhead Console

1 – Driver's Reading/Map Light Switch
2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch
3 – Overhead Lights Switch
4 – Front Map Reading Lights Switch
5 – Passenger's Reading/Map Light Switch
6 – Passenger's Reading/Map Light
7 — Center Reading/Map Light
8 – Driver's Reading/Map Light

NOTE:

Before getting out of the vehicle, ensure that the overhead lights are off. This will prevent the battery level from being drained once the doors are closed. If a light is left on accidentally, the overhead lights turn off automatically approximately 15 minutes after the engine has been turned off.

Overhead Light Timing

To assist getting in and out of the vehicle at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed modes are available to keep the interior lighting on after the engine is turned off.

Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle

The overhead lights will illuminate as follows:

☐ For a few seconds when the doors are unlocked.
☐ For approximately three minutes when one of the doors is opened.
☐ For a few seconds when the doors are locked.

Timing is interrupted when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

Exiting Overhead Light Timing

The overhead lights will turn off as follows:

□ After all doors are closed upon entering the vehicle, the three minute timer will stop and a second timer will start for the overhead lights. This timing will end when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
□ When the doors are locked.
□ After 15 minutes to preserve the battery.

Timing While Getting Out Of The Vehicle

After placing the ignition in the OFF position, the overhead lights will turn on as follows:

☐ For a few seconds after the engine stops.
☐ For approximately three minutes when one of the doors is opened.
☐ For a few seconds when the last door closed.

The timing ends automatically when the doors are locked.

Interior Ambient Lighting

The brightness of the interior passenger compartment lights can be adjusted through the radio system.

To access the adjustment function, on the main menu select the following items in sequence:

1. "Settings."
2. "Lights."
3. "Interior Ambient Lighting."

The lights can be adjusted to seven different levels of brightness.

Rear Overhead Light

The rear overhead lights are activated or deactivated by two on/off switches located within the lights on the ceiling above the rear seats.

Diagram showing car seat positioning with numbered labels pointing to a red car seat and a magnified inset view.

Rear Overhead Light

1 – Passenger Rear Overhead Light
2 – Driver Rear Overhead Light
3 – Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch
4 – Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch

The light turns on when a door is opened.

NOTE:

The light will turn off automatically after a few minutes if a door is left open. To turn it on again, open another door or close and reopen the same door.

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

With the daytime running lights or headlights on, rotate the dimmer control upward to increase the instrument panel brightness and the control button icons. Rotate the dimmer control downward to decrease brightness.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with rotary dial and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

Dimmer Control

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel.

The windshield wipers will only operate with the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

CAUTION!

☐ Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off.
☐ In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the "Park" position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
□ Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotating the switch to the Low Continuous Wiper Speed position (2) activates the first (low) level continuous speed of the windshield wipers in manual mode.

Rotating the switch to the High Continuous Wiper Speed position (1) activates the second (high) level continuous speed of the windshield wipers in manual mode.

1 2 3 4 5 MIST M0318000051U5

Windshield Wiper Switch

1 – High Continuous Wiper Speed
2 — Low Continuous Wiper Speed
3 — High Sensitivity Rain Sensing
4 — Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing
5 — Windshield Wiper Off

Rain Sensors

Rotating the switch to the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (4), activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function.

Rotating the switch to the High Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (3), activates the second, more sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function ↗ page 47.

Windshield Washer

To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper lever toward the steering wheel and hold.

Both the windshield washer jet and the wind-shield wiper will be activated. The wipers and washers will continue to operate until you let go of the lever.

The windshield wiper stops working three strokes after the lever is released, followed by a final stroke six seconds later to complete the cycle.

Mist

Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE:

The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

For information on wiper care and replacement, see ↩ page 218.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as signal, weather, driving, and search.

Rain Sensing Wipers

This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers. The Rain Sensor is located behind the interior rearview mirror.

Interior view of a vehicle showing internal compartments and a red dot (no text or symbols visible)

Rain Sensor

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature.

The sensor has an adjustment range that varies progressively from wiper still (no stroke) when the windshield is dry, to wiper at continuous speed (fast operation) with intense rain.

Activation

Rotating the wiper switch to the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (3) activates the rain sensor.

The activation of the rain sensor system is done by tapping the wiper stalk upwards while the switch is in the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (3).

The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor operation is also signaled by a stroke of the wiper.

If the windshield washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, and then the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic operation.

NOTE:

□ Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.
☐ With the windshield wiper lever in the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (4) or High Sensitivity Rain Sensing position (3), wiping operates automatically and is disabled when the outside temperature is below 32^ F ( 0^ C).

Deactivation

To turn off the Rain Sensing Wipers, use the wiper switch or place the ignition in the OFF position.

In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor while it is active, the windshield wiper operates intermittently at a speed consistent with the sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, whether or not there is rain on the glass for as long as the sensor failure is indicated on the display.

The sensor continues to operate and it is possible to set the windshield wiper to continuous mode (1 or 2). The failure indication remains on for as long as the sensor is active.

The rain sensor is able to recognize and automatically adjust itself in the presence of the following conditions:

□ Presence of dirt on the controlled surface (salt, dirt, etc.).
☐ Presence of streaks of water caused by the worn window wiper blades.
☐ Difference between day and night.

CLIMATE CONTROL

The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUTO A M MAX OFF A/C REAR AUTO SYNC 10 11 12 13 14 15

M0320000289US

Automatic Climate Control System (Instrument Panel Controls)

1 – Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 9 – Passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob
2 – Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation) 10 – SYNC Button (Set Temperature Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side
3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selection Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — If Equipped
4 – Max Defrost Button 12 – Air Conditioning Button
5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — If Equipped
6 — Rear Defrost Button 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button — If Equipped
7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Selection Button 15 — Air Recirculation Button
8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

Touchscreen Controls

1 2 3 4 5 12:36 24.5° est. 22.5 OFF AUTO A/C A M MAX REAR AUTO SYNC 22.5 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

Automatic Climate Control System (Touchscreen Controls)

1 — Driver Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 8 — Heated Rear Window On/Off Button
2 — Driver Side Air Distribution Buttons 9 — MAX-DEF Activation/Deactivation Button (Rapid Defrosting/Demisting)
3 – Fan Speed Adjustment Button 10 – Air Recirculation On/Off Button
4 – Passenger Side Air Distribution Buttons 11 – Climate Control System Compressor On/Off Button
5 – Passenger Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 12 – Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)
6 — SYNC Button 13 — Climate Control System On/Off Button
7 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

CAUTION!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of this system.

Description

The Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System adjusts the temperature and air distribution independently between the driver and passenger.

The system maintains the set temperature inside the passenger compartment and compensates for outside temperature change.

NOTE:

The reference temperature is 72^ F ( 22^ C) for optimal comfort management.

The automatic setting will adjust the following to maintain comfort within the passenger compartment:

☐ Air temperature from the driver/front passenger side vents
☐ Air distribution from the driver/front passenger side vents
☐ Fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow)
☐ Compressor variations (for cooling/dehumidifying the air)
□ Air recirculation

The Climate Control System can also be operated manually by using the buttons and knobs on the faceplate.

Manual selections will override the automatic settings, which are stored until the AUTO button is pushed. If the system intervenes for safety reasons, the automatic setting will take control of the system.

The below operations will not deactivate the automatic (AUTO) function:

□ Air Recirculation activation/deactivation
□ A/C activation/deactivation
□ SYNC function activation
□ Rear Window Defrost activation/deactivation

When in AUTO mode, the vehicle's internal temperature is controlled according to the set temperature.

The following can be manually set or adjusted:

□ Driver/passenger air temperature
□ Blower speed (continuous variation)
☐ Air distribution (seven positions for driver and passenger)
□ A/C activation
□ Front Defrost
□ Air recirculation
□ Rear Defrost
□ System deactivation

A/C Compressor

Push the A/C button or the icon to activate or deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator illuminated when activated). The A/C compressor will remain off even after the engine has stopped.

When the A/C compressor is turned off, the system deactivates air recirculation to prevent the windows from fogging up. If the climate control system can maintain the temperature, with the A/C turned off, the AUTO feature will remain on and the AUTO button indicator light will not switch off.

To restore automatic control of the A/C compressor, push the A/C button or the AUTO button. With the A/C compressor off, the air speed can be set manually using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob.

When the A/C compressor is on, and the engine is running, air speed cannot be lower than the minimum speed (only one indicator light is lit).

NOTE:

When the A/C is off, the Climate Control system can not produce air that is colder than the current outside temperature. Under certain environmental conditions, windows could fog up rapidly, since the air is not dehumidified.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including car, camera, vehicle, and inspection.

Air Recirculation And Air Quality System (AQS)

Air Recirculation is managed according to the following operating mode:

☐ Automatic engagement: indicator is illuminated above the "A" on the Air Recirculation Button
☐ Forced activation (air circulation always activated): indicator illuminated above the icon on the Air Recirculation Button
☐ Forced deactivation (air recirculation always off with intake of outside air): both indicators not illuminated on the Air Recirculation Button

The three operating conditions are obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation Button in sequence.

Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped

When the automatic recirculation function is selected, the AQS function automatically activates internal air recirculation when the outside air is polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).

At low external temperatures or in high humidity, the automatic function turns off to avoid fogging up the windows. The user can select the function again by pushing the Air Recirculation Button.

In automatic operation, air recirculation will be controlled by the system according to outside environmental conditions.

NOTE:

☐ With the AQS function active and after the internal air recirculation system has been functioning for a set amount of time, the Climate Control System enables air intake to cycle the air in the passenger compartment for a set time. The AQS function is disabled during the air changes.
☐ The engagement of the recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it can increase the possibility of the windows fogging. When the outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Front Defrost

Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and ow defrosting and defogging.

Rear Defrost

Push the Rear Defrost button to activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear Defrost.

The Rear Defrost will turn off after 20 minutes or once the engine is turned off.

NOTE:

To avoid damage, do not apply stickers over the interior heating filaments of the Rear Defrost.

Front Defrost And MAX-DEF Function

Push the MAX-DEF button (indicator illuminated) to defrost the wind-shield and side windows.

While in MAX-DEF function, the air conditioner will:

□ Activate the air conditioner compressor when the weather allows
□ Turn air recirculation off
☐ Set the maximum air temperature (HI) on both the driver and passenger side
□ Activate a blower speed based on the temperature of the engine coolant
□ Adjust the air flow towards the windshield and front side windows
□ Activate the Rear Window Defrost
□ Display the fan speed (indicators illuminated) and current air distribution setting

NOTE:

The MAX-DEF function remains active for approximately three minutes once the engine coolant reaches the proper temperature.

When the function is on, AUTO mode will deactivate. The only manual operations possible are adjusting blower speed and turning off the Rear Window Defrost.

Pushing the button switches off the MAX-DEF function.

Air Temperature Adjustment

Rotate the driver or passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise for warmer temperatures or counterclockwise for cooler temperatures. The set temperatures are shown on the radio system.

Push the SYNC button to sync the driver and passenger air temperatures.

Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC function. This will set a new passenger side temperature.

Rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI (maximum heating) setting or fully counterclockwise to engage the LO (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate these functions, rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob to the desired temperature.

Rear passengers' temperature is linked to driver side selection.

AUTO Button

When the AUTO button is pushed (indicator illuminated), the Climate Control system automatically adjusts the following settings:

□ Quantity and distribution of air flow in the passenger compartment
□ The air conditioner
□ Air recirculation
□ Cancels any manual settings

Selecting the AUTO function illuminates the indicator on the A/C button or ⚙.

If air distribution or the fan speed is manually adjusted, the AUTO button indicator turns off to indicate that the Climate Control system is no longer in AUTO mode.

After a manual adjustment, push the AUTO button to resume the automatic system.

SYNC Button

Push the SYNC button (indicator illuminated) to sync the passenger side air temperature with the driver side air temperature.

This function makes temperature regulation easier when the driver is traveling alone.

Turn the passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob or push the passenger side Air Distribution Selection Button to change the passenger side air temperature and return to separate air temperature management.

Blower Speed

Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase or decrease the blower speed. The speed is displayed with lighted indicators in the radio system display.

☐ Maximum fan speed = all indicators illuminated on the radio system display
☐ Minimum fan speed = one indicator illuminated on the radio system display

The fan can be turned off by rotating the Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to the off position (all segments on the radio system display are turned off).

NOTE:

To restore automatic control of the fan speed, push the AUTO button.

Air Distribution Selection

Push the Air Distribution Selection button on the faceplate to change the mode of air distribution.

NOTE:

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls automatically manage the air distribution. When set manually, the respective symbols on the radio system indicate the air distribution setting.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel to ventilate the chest and face. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. This setting heats the passenger compartment the quickest.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Front Defrost And Panel Mode

Air flow is distributed between the windshield demisting/defrosting vents and side/central dashboard vents. This setting allows air to flow to the windshield on sunny days.

Front Defrost And Bi-Level Mode

Air flow is distributed to all vents.

Switching The Climate Control System On/Off

To Turn Off The Climate Control System

Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob completely counterclockwise to turn off the Climate Control System.

With the air conditioner is off:

□ Air recirculation is on
☐ The A/C compressor is off
□ The fan is off
☐ The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated

NOTE:

The climate control system stores the previously set temperatures and resumes operation when any button on the system is pushed.

To Turn On The Climate Control System

To switch the climate control system on in automatic mode, push the AUTO button.

Operating Mode

The Climate Control system can be activated in different ways. It is recommended to use the automatic function. Push the AUTO button and set the desired temperatures.

The automatic system adjusts the temperature, quantity, and distribution of air introduced into the passenger compartment. It also controls air recirculation and the activation of the air conditioner.

At any time during automatic operation, you can change the temperature, activate or deactivate the Rear Defrost, activate SYNC, activate or deactivate the air conditioner, and activate or deactivate air recirculation. The system will automatically adjust to the new settings.

Climate Control Display Settings

The Climate Control settings are visible on the radio screen.

The display on the radio system is a pop up window, which is activated by pushing the buttons or turning the knobs on the Climate Control system. The indicator lights located on

the number of buttons and knobs indicate that the selected feature is on/off. If no operation is performed for a predetermined time, the pop-up will close on the display.

Humidity Sensor

The Humidity Sensor helps prevent the windows from fogging up. The AUTO function (indicator illuminated) must be on for the Humidity Sensor to function.

When outside temperature is low, the system may turn the compressor on and turn air recirculation off for safer driving.

Stop/Start

The Stop/Start system shuts off the engine when the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), as a fuel conservation measure.

In order to maintain comfort in the cabin, the Stop/Start feature will not activate if any of the following conditions exist:

☐ The climate control system is in AUTO mode (indicator illuminated), and the vehicle has yet to reach the set temperature
☐ The climate control system is in LO maximum cooling
☐ The climate control system is in HI maximum heating
☐ The climate control system is in the MAX-DEF status

When the Stop/Start system is active, the engine will restart if the inside temperature changes significantly, or if the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is activated.

With Stop/Start system on (engine is off), air flow is reduced to keep the compartment comfort conditions for longer.

Until the temperature drastically changes within the cabin, the climate control system will continue to maintain the temperature while the engine is off. By deactivating the Stop/Start system with the Button (located by the head-light switch), the climate control system operates normally according to the settings.

NOTE:

☐ In harsh climate conditions, limit the use of the Stop/Start system to prevent the compressor from continuously switching on and off. This will prevent rapid misting of the windows and the accumulation of humidity in the passenger compartment.
☐ When the Stop/Start system is on, the climate control system will always take air in from outside, reducing the probability of the windows fogging up.

System Maintenance

In winter months, the Climate Control system must be turned on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes.

Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before the summer.

INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing red highlight and white head (no text or symbols visible)

Opening The Glove Compartment

Pull the release handle to open the glove compartment.

When the glove compartment is opened, a light turns on to illuminate the inside of the compartment.

NOTE:

☐ If equipped with a lock, unlock the glove compartment by placing the emergency key in the lock on the handle.
☐ Do not insert large objects that will prevent the glove compartment from closing completely.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision.

Center Console

The center console storage compartment is located between the front seats.

To access the center console storage, lift the upper part of the center console.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with red plastic seat cover and black arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Center Console

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

Power Outlet

Your vehicle is equipped with a 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlet is labeled with either a "key" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.

NOTE:

All accessories connected to the "battery" powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

115 Volt Power Inverter — If Equipped

The Power Inverter is located inside of the center console. It can be used for small battery-powered electrical appliances with powers up to 150 W (e.g. cameras, video camera, tablets, razors, etc.)

NOTE:

Do not connect devices with powers higher than 150 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adapters.

Interior view of a car airway with two main compartments, one containing a red plastic container and the other with a black handle (no text or symbols visible)

Center Console Power Outlet

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

☐ Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
□ Do not touch with wet hands.
☐ Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.
☐ If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

☐ Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
□ Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
□ Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
□ After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray — If Equipped

If equipped, the cigar lighter is located on the bottom of the center stack, in front of the cupholders.

To activate the cigar lighter, push in and wait a few seconds. Once the cigar lighter has returned to its original position, it is ready for use.

NOTE:

Always ensure the cigar lighter is turned off when not in use.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control knobs and a highlighted red button (no text or symbols visible)

1 – Cigar Lighter

If equipped, the ash tray is a removable plastic container located inside the cupholder.

Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and highlighted red area (no text or symbols visible)

Wireless Charging Pad

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless charging pad located inside of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile device.

Your mobile phone must be designed for QI wireless charging.

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as signal, weather, driving, and inspection.

NOTE:

☐ Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing or near the wireless charging pad.
☐ Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display facing upward) on the wireless charging pad.
☐ The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in order for the phone to charge.
☐ To avoid interference with the key fob search, the wireless charging pad will stop charging when any door is opened.

CAUTION!

The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it. Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the vehicle from starting.

The following messages will display in the radio system:

☐ "Your Phone Is Being Charged" — The phone has begun to charge.
☐ "Phone Fully Charged" — The phone has completed charging its battery.
☐ “Foreign Object Detected” — The phone is not enabled for wireless charging or an object that is not permitted has been placed on the wireless charging pad.
☐ "Unavailable System" — There is a malfunction with the wireless charging pad.

The driver can deactivate these messages through the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.

POWER WINDOWS

Power Window Controls

The power window switches work with the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position and for three minutes after the ignition has been placed in the OFF position. When one of the front doors is opened, this operation is disabled.

The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered red switches and a control knob, likely for diagnostic or safety instructions.

Power Window Switches

1 - Front Left Window Switch
2 — Front Right Window Switch
3 — Rear Right Window Switch
4 - Window Lockout Switch
5 - Rear Left Window Switch

The passenger door windows can also be operated by using the single window controls on the passenger door trim panel.

To open the window part way (manually), push the window switch down briefly and release. Push past the detent to activate “continuous automatic” operation.

If the button is pushed again, the window will stop in the desired position.

Pull the window switch to the first detent to move the window upward. Pull the window switch to the second detent, and the window will go up automatically.

To close the window, pull the window switch up. To stop the window during Auto-Up operation, push or pull the window switch again.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

The vehicle is equipped with an anti-pinch safety device for closing the windows.

If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window's movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children inside the vehicle.

The anti-pinch safety function is activated both during the manual and the automatic operation of the window.

When the anti-pinch system is activated, the window closing is immediately interrupted. Then the window closing is automatically reversed and the window lowers by about 8 inches (20 cm) in relation to the first stop position. The window cannot be operated during this time.

NOTE:

In the event of an error, or if the anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing operation of the window will be deactivated. In order to restore the correct operation of the system, the window must be lowered.

Power Window System Initialization

If power supply is interrupted, the electric window automatic operation must be reinitialized.

To perform the initialization procedure, which must be done on each door with the doors closed, manually fully close the window to be initialized.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as signal, weather, driving, and inspection.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

Power Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of two glass panels (the front one is power and the rear one fixed) and is fitted with a power sunshade in the front, as well as a manually operated sunshade in the rear.

Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the ignition placed in the ACC or ON/RUN position ↩ page 19.

Diagram of a car air conditioner panel with labeled buttons and directional arrows, showing three key functions.

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

1 - Power Shade Open/Close
2 - Open/Close Button
3 – Vent Open/Close

The sunroof has three preset positions:

□ Fully closed
□ Comfort (intermediate opening)
□ Fully open

NOTE:

You cannot have the sunshade closed when the sunroof is open.

WARNING!

□ Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
☐ In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening And Closing The Sunroof

To open the sunroof's front panel, push the open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle to open to the comfort position (half way). Pushing the button a second time will open to the fully open position.

To close the sunroof, push the open/close button toward the front of the vehicle. The roof will close completely.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the open/close button again.

CAUTION!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it.

Venting Sunroof

To bring the roof into vent position, push and release the vent button.

This type of vent opening can be activated regardless of the position of the sunroof. When starting with the roof in the closed position, pushing the vent button automatically causes the sunroof to open to the vent position. If the roof is already open, the button must be held until the roof reaches the vent-opening position.

Pushing vent button again during automatic movement of the roof will stop it.

Sun Shade Operation

The front sunshade is power operated.

Push the Power Shade open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle to open the front sun shade to the three quarter open position. Pushing the button a second time will open the sunshade completely.

Push the Power Shade open/close button toward the front of the vehicle to close the sun shade.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the Power Shade open/close button again.

To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshade manually toward the rear of the vehicle.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle during the closing movement. If an obstacle is detected, the system intervenes and the movement of the sunroof is immediately reversed into opening.

Re-Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroof must be re-initialized in case of faulty sunroof operation. It may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof after the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and then reconnected.

NOTE:

The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during the re-initialization procedure.

Proceed as follows:

1. With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, make sure the sunroof glass is fully closed (sunshade open).
2. Open the driver's side door, and place the ignition in the OFF position.
3. Within five seconds, place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
4. Within 10 seconds, push and hold the sunroof close switch (forward). After 8 - 10 seconds of holding the switch, the re-initialization process will begin.

Continue to hold the switch while the sunroof motor cycles, and the sunshade will fully close.

1. Once the sunroof glass and the power sunshade have stopped motion, release the sunroof close switch, then push and hold it again within five seconds. Continue to hold the switch while the sunshade fully opens, the sunroof glass fully opens, followed by the glass fully closing then the sunshade fully closing.

2. Release the switch once the operations stop. Re-initialization of the sunroof motors is now complete.

NOTE:

If the switch is released prior to full completion of the operations described, the entire re-initialization procedure must be repeated from step 1.

1. Confirm express operations for the sunroof glass and sunshade are functional for opening and closing operations.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.

HOOD

Opening

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located underneath the driver's side of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Hood Release Lever

1. Lift the hood slightly. Move the underhood latch from right to left to release the hood.

3D rendered image of a car front view showing the windshield and side-mounted parts (no text or symbols visible)

Release Hood Latch To The Left

1. Raise the hood completely. The operation is assisted by the addition of two gas props which hold it in the open position.

NOTE:

☐ Do not tamper with the props and assist the hood while lifting it.
□ Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting, check that the windshield wiper arms are not raised from the windshield or in operation, that the vehicle is stationary and that the Electric Park Brake is engaged.

Closing

To close, lower the hood to approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from the engine compartment then let it drop. Make sure that the hood is completely closed and fully latched.

NOTE:

Since the hood is equipped with a double locking system, one for each side, check that it is closed on both its side ends.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

TRUNK

The trunk unlocking is electrically operated and is deactivated when the vehicle is in motion.

Opening

Opening From The Outside

When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from outside the vehicle using the exterior trunk lid release button located between the plate lights. Push the button until you hear a "click." The trunk lid can also be opened by quickly pushing the exterior trunk lid release button on the key fob twice.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a red arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols visible)

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button

The turn signal indicators will blink and the interior lights will turn on when the trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed.

The lights turn off automatically after a few minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

Opening From The Inside

When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from inside the vehicle using the interior trunk lid release button, located under the dashboard near the engine hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid release button until you hear a "click."

Close-up of a car interior with a red circular icon highlighting a specific area, no visible text or symbols.

Interior Trunk Lid Release Button

Trunk Lid Emergency Opening

A lever can be found in the trunk lid over the lock to allow opening from the inside.

Diagram showing a car with a red button and circular arrow, no readable text or symbols present

Emergency Release Button

Pull the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever can be seen in the dark.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as signal, camera, car, and search

Closing

Grip one of the handles and lower the trunk lid until it clicks.

Close-up of a transparent robotic head with red circular highlights and mechanical components (no visible text or symbols)

Trunk Lid Interior Handles

NOTE:

☐ It will not be possible to open the trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid opening strap on the trunk lid lock before disconnecting the battery ➤ page 250.

Trunk Initialization

NOTE:

If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid opening/closing mechanism must be re-initialized as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.
2. Push the lock button on the remote control.
3. Push the unlock button on the remote control.

Trunk Specifications

Access To The Tire Service Kit (Quadrifoglio Models)

To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the carpet in the trunk ↩ page 194.

Top-down view of a white car backseat with red bedding and side-mounted headlights (no visible text or symbols)

Cargo Area (Quadrifoglio Models)

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs — If Equipped

There are four hooks inside the trunk for attaching the cargo net or cables which can safely secure the cargo.

Top-down view of a car trunk with four black arrows pointing to red buttons (no text or symbols)

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

NOTE:

Do not apply a load greater than 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.

Cargo Net — If Equipped

This is useful for correctly arranging the cargo and/or for transporting light materials.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

The following systems are used for reducing engine emissions:

□ Catalytic Converter
□ Oxygen Sensors
□ Evaporation Control System

ACTIVE AERODYNAMIC SPOILER (QUADRIFOGLIO VEHICLES)

Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Spoiler

This is an automatic device working at the vehicle speed to regulate air flow in the lower part of the vehicle. It allows higher reactivity at average speeds and higher vehicle stability at high speeds.

NOTE:

The Active Aero Spoiler is active in the Dynamic or RACE mode of the Alfa DNA Pro Selector; it is not active in any mode when external temperatures are near or below zero.

Front view of a silver car with red and black decorative trim (no visible text or symbols)

Front Fascia

If there is a fault, a generic failure icon will light up on the instrument panel display, along with a message that will identify the type of malfunction. See an authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as signal, camera, car, and search.

This section gives you all the information you need to understand and use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

Instrument Cluster

M0401000097US Ola Race 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 BRAKE ESC OFF 240 140 240 160- 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 100/1000/1000

Base Instrument Cluster

Olja Romec 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 100 180 210 240 270 150 80 120 -60 90 40 60 30 20 0 MPH E BRAKE ESC OFF -200- -330 km/h

Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster

1. Tachometer
2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light
3. Driver Interactive Display
4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The triangle on the left side of the symbol indicates that the Fuel Door Location is on the left side of the vehicle)
5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

Tachometer

The Tachometer indicates the engine Revolutions Per Minute (Giri).

Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting (Brightness Sensor)

Inside the Tachometer there is a light sensor capable of detecting light and adjusting the brightness of the instrument panel and the Information and Entertainment System display.

Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

The digital indicator monitors the temperature of the engine oil and starts supplying indications when the oil temperature reaches approximately 122°F (50°C).

Under normal usage, the temperature should remain around the middle of the digital scale according to the working conditions.

The Engine Oil Temperature warning light will turn on to signal the excessive increase of the engine oil temperature.

In the event of excessive engine oil temperature, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Fuel Level Gauge

The digital fuel gauge monitors the amount of fuel in the tank.

When the Fuel Level warning light turns on, a message is displayed, and a chime will sound when 2.3 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.

Proceeding further, the second white notch will go off and the last one will become red together with the indication "E" present at the bottom of the tank.

150 180 140 200 120 220 100 240 -80 OFF 60 260- 约 () 40 20 0 kA/°S M0402000072US

Fuel Level Gauge

NOTE:

If the low fuel warning light turns on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel station.

CAUTION!

Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage the catalytic converter.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Instrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Under The Table | Perms by An 55 400 ms

Instrument Cluster Display

Reconfigurable Display Items

1. External Lights (Low Beam/High Beam) Display
2. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems, Cruise Control Change Information
3. Speed Limiter Display
4. Driving Assistance Systems (Forward Collision Warning (FCW), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Highway Assist System (HAS)) Information Display

5. Active Cruise Control (ACC) / Cruise Control (CC) Information Display

6. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) / Speed Limiter Information Display

7. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) Information Display

8. Time

9. External Temperature

10. Main Display: Vehicle Speed Display, Trip Computer Information, etc...

The screens can be selected, on rotation, by pushing the MENU selection button on the windshield wiper stalk.

MENU MIST

MENU Selection/Reset Button

Depending on the driving mode chosen using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, and Advanced Efficiency) the screens can be graphically different. Navigation instructions and call information can be set and displayed in the Information and Entertainment System.

Home

The parameters shown on the display, for the modes: Dynamic, Normal and Advanced Efficiency are:

• Time
• External Temperature
- Current speed (shown only if the repeat mode of the "Navigation" and "Phone" functions have not been previously activated).
- Range
In RACE mode (if equipped) the consumption indication index is not active and a sports gear shift indicator is displayed.

1—12:36 PM 2—79.7 °F Under The Table [ Remix by Av] 4—66 mph d 2 V/130 km 10 20 30 47,184 mi 362 mi +?

Instrument Cluster Display

1-Time
2 - Temperature
3 – Distance To Empty
4 - Speed

3 12:36 PM NW 26 °F 250 YD 75936 m/s 358 m/s

Instrument Cluster Display

Trip A And B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, and Advanced Efficiency) and with the ignition device ON, the Trip computer can be used to display the measurements regarding the operating state of the vehicle. This function is characterized by two separate records, called Trip A and Trip B (the latter can be deactivated by Information and Entertainment System), where the complete journeys are recorded in a reciprocally independent manner.

Trip A and Trip B are used to display the values relating to:

• Distance traveled
• Average fuel consumption
- Average speed
• Active trip
• Fuel consumption indicator

D3 12:36 PM 79.7 °F mph Trip A 1234.5 mi 010:00 h average 50 mph 10.5 mpg 123 1234 75936 mi NW

Instrument Cluster Display

To reset the values, press and hold down the button on the windshield wiper stalk.

Menu + A Lock + A Trim + Four + Four + Four + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six + Six

MENU Selection/Reset Button

Performance

The displayed parameters differ according to the active mode. The modes which can be selected using the Alfa DNA system are:

Natural

Efficiency Consumption Graph

The screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption.

Advanced Efficiency

D3 12:36 PM 79.7 °F 6 7 1 2 3 75936 mi 583 mi +1 Volume

Dynamic Driving Style

1 - Acceleration
2 - Deceleration
3 - Gear Shifts

The three central icons, on the screen, indicate the effectiveness of the driving style linked to the parameters of: acceleration, deceleration and gear shift with a view to reducing fuel consumption.

The graphic bar below the icons shows current consumption and the green line represents the optimal area. The globe lights up gradually according to lower consumption.

Alternative Performance

The displayed parameters vary depending on the active mode. The modes can be selected through the "Alfa DNATM" system and are as follows:

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

The display graphically shows the values of:

• instantaneous consumption
• average fuel consumption (based on "Trip A");

Below a certain speed value, when the accelerator pedal is not pressed or in the event of failure, dashes are displayed in place of the consumption value ("--").

D3 12:36 PM 79.7 °F mph 20 mpg 20.2 average consumption 19mpg a 75936 mi 583 mi

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

Dynamic

The display graphically shows the values of:

• accelerator pedal position (expressed in percentage);
• brake pedal position (expressed in percentage):
  ○ engine coolant temperature (H = hot C = cold).

M3 12:36 PM mph 79.7°F gas brake water lamp IC 47,184 mi 361 mi

Dynamic

Race (If Equipped)

The display graphically shows the values of:

o engine torque;
- turbocharger pressure;

○ engine oil pressure (L = low pressure/H = high pressure).

NOTE:

The engine torque and turbocharger pressure values vary according to the engine type.

M1 MPH torque 400 10 turbo 2 oil 16 mi 360 mi

Race

Dynamic

D 12:36 PM 50 MPH 78 °F 0.72 peak g d G-Force 16 ml NW

Acceleration Gauge

The displayed parameters are related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated.

1. Driving Mode Display (Alfa DNA System)
2. Distance Traveled (miles/km) display
3. Fuel Consumption
4. Warning Indications Display (e.g. danger of ice, open doors, ABS operation, etc.)
5. Range

Customer Programmable Settings

Multiple settings can be programmed by the user using the radio. This section describes only the basic settings:

□ Units & Language
□ Clock & Date
□ Cluster

To access the settings list in the radio, proceed as follows:

☐ Press the Home button to access the main menu.
☐ Select Settings from the main menu using the Rotary Knob or by pressing Settings on the touchscreen.

① ② ③ ④ M0402000107US

Rotary Knob

1 - ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob
2 - OPTION Button
3 – Rotary Pad
4 - MENU Button

Units & Language

The following settings can be modified under the "Units & Language" menu:

☐ Units: select US, Metric, or Custom. The custom option allows for individual selection of the unit measures
☐ Language: change the language of the system
- Restore Unit & Language Settings: restores the factory settings

To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting on the touchscreen.

Clock & Date

The following settings can be modified under the "Clock & Date" menu:

☐ Sync With GPS Time: activates or deactivates the clock synchronization through the GPS. If the function is deactivated, the options Set Time and Set Date are enabled
☐ Set Time: set the time manually
☐ Time Format: set the time format to either a 12-hour or a 24-hour clock
□ Set Date: set the date manually
☐ Restore Clock & Date Settings: restores the factory settings

To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting on the touchscreen.

Cluster

The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

□ Warning Buzzer Volume: allows you to set the volume of the warning buzzer on seven levels.
☐ Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function.
☐ Show Phone Info: allows you to activate/deactivate repetition of the phone function screens also on the instrument panel display.

☐ Show Audio Info: allows you to activate/deactivate repetition of the audio function screens (Radio and Media) also on the instrument panel display.
☐ Show Nav Info: allows you to activate/deactivate repetition of the navigator function screens also on the instrument panel display.
☐ Digital speed on all screens: this allows you to activate/deactivating of digital speed on the instrument panel display screens other than the main screen.
☐ Consumption Bar: allows you to activate/deactivate the consumption baron the display screens of the instrument panel where it is available.
☐ Performance pages: allows you to choose, for each driving mode, one of the two alternative contents displayed in the screen.
□ Custom areas: allows you to select which content to display in each of the three customizable areas on the display of the instrument panel: time, date, outside temperature, radio information, compass.
- Restore Cluster Settings: deletes the current settings and restores the factory settings.
To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad or press the desired setting on the touchscreen.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

The following pages consist of warning lights and messages.

NOTE:

☐ The warning light turns on together with a dedicated message and/or chime when applicable. These indications are precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner's Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure indication.
☐ The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle." Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. You can stop the warning cycle in both cases by pushing the button located on the windshield wiper stalk. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation, safety, and related activities with Chinese labels

corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

☐ The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Failure

The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates either a failure of the EBD system or

that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to have the system inspected immediately.

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound → page 159.

WARNING!

☐ The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
☐ If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

Amber Warning Lights

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

This light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started.

ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system.

Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started.

The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated ➔ page 141.

When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

Tire Pressure Low Warning Light

The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is g. In these cases, optimal tire duration consumption may not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is "See Manual" → page 156.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

WARNING!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

Rear Fog Lights

The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as the engine is started.

The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue traveling at moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light ☐ does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or is flashing when traveling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System

This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal collision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Fuel Reserve/Limited Range

The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

WARNING!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

Green Indicator Lights

Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

Left Turn Signal Indicator Light

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s)

(front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Headlight Off Delay

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the OFF position.

Right Turn Signal Indicator Light

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s)

(front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Blue Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to

high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

Red Symbols

Alfa Steering Torque (AST) Failure

The switching on of the telltale signals a failure in the automatic steering correction system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Alternator Failure

The switching on of the telltale with engine on corresponds to an alternator failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic Transmission Failure

The telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning, to indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System Activation

The symbol appears, together with a message on the display, in case of activation of the DAA system.

Stop to pause while driving, pulling the car over in safe conditions.

Door Open

The telltale turns on when one or more doors are not completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

Power Steering Failure

If the telltale remains on, you may not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel may be increased;

steering is, however, possible.

NOTE:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other, and then turn it back to the central position.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This warning light, along with the related message, signals a failure in the ETC.

If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on while the engine is running.

Place the gear selector in the Park (P) position and the ignition in the off position: the warning light should switch off. If the warning light stays on with engine running, the vehicle can still be driven.

If the warning light flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of performance, irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take place and the vehicle may need to be towed.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Engine Coolant Temperature Too High

The telltale lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, fill with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself.

Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the telltale comes on when the engine is started again.

If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above.

Hood Cap Not Properly Shut

The telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open hood cap appears on the

display.

A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and the vehicle is moving.

Close the hood properly.

Insufficient Engine Oil Level

The telltale turns on, along with the related message on the display, to indicate low engine oil level.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and

shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.

NOTE:

Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The turning on of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Trunk Lid Not Properly Shut

The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open trunk lid appears on the display.

A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

Close the trunk lid properly.

Amber Symbols

Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-In Attempt

Engine Immobilizer System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Fuel Cut-Off Indicator Light

The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred and the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system ➤ page 159. If it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

Park Sensors System Failure

The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is not available.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Vertical sequence of gray icons representing various service or operational categories, including car, sun, helmet, and tools.

Engine Oil Change Required — If Equipped

The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

NOTE:

After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed.

If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil pressure sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Engine Oil Level Sensor Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System Failure — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Stop/Start System Failure

This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Rain Sensor Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the automatic wind-shield wiper.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Dusk Sensor Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the automatic low beam alignment.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Blind Spot Monitoring System Failure — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Fuel Level Sensor Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Exterior Lights Failure

The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical connection.

Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an authorized dealer.

Keyless System Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Fuel Cut-Off System Failure

The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System Failure — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Lane Departure Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic High Beam Headlights Failure — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the automatic high beam headlights.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Automatic Transmission Fluid Overheating

The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or idling.

Audio System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Speed Limiter System Failure

While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed Limiter system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap

Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly closed.

Tighten the cap properly.

Electric Park Brake Failure

The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system.

This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle because the park brake could remain activated even if automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure → page 201.

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, that the electric park brake is not operational.

WARNING!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

Low Coolant Level — If Equipped

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle coolant level is low.

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System

This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Wear On Brake Pads

This light will illuminate when the brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE:

Always use genuine parts or similar because the Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.

Dynamic Drive Control System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic drive control system.

Windshield Wiper Failure

Signals a windshield wiper failure. Contact an authorized dealer.

Generic Indication

Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

All Wheel Drive Failure

This telltale will illuminate along with an accompanying message when the AWD dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to prevent The traction system will work in RWD this instance.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Temporary All Wheel Drive Failure — If Equipped

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWD dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The traction

system will work in RWD mode in this instance. In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce the load to allow the system to cool down. The AWD system will resume normal operation when the symbol disappears from the display.

ABS Activation

This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABS system has activated.

Adaptive Front Lighting System Failure

The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic directional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Soft Suspension Calibration Insertion — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

Shock Absorbers Failure

While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure in the suspension system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Windshield Washer Liquid Level

The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

Always use liquid with the features indicated in the "Fluids And Lubricants" ↗ page 214.

WEAR ON Carbon Ceramic Material (CCM) Brake Discs — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic material brake discs have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING!

It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System Failure

The symbol comes on in the event of a DAA system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Highway Assist System (HAS)/Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) System Failure

The symbol lights up in case of HAS or TJA system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Green Symbols

Headlights

The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

Automatic Headlights

The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

Stop/Start Operation

The telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine).

When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off ➤ page 102.

Cruise Control Activated

The telltale will illuminate when the Cruise Control system is activated.

Adaptive Cruise Control System — If Equipped

The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Automatic High Beam Headlights — If Equipped

The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

High Beam Headlights

The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

Operation

The Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD) carries out a continuous diagnosis of the components of the vehicle related to emissions.

It also alerts the driver of when these components are no longer in peak condition by switching on the warning light on the instrument panel → page 73.

The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diagnostic) is to:

□ Monitor the efficiency of the system
□ Indicate an increase in emissions
□ Indicate the need to replace damaged components

The vehicle also has a connector, which can interface with appropriate tools, that makes it possible to read the error codes stored in the electronic control units together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis. This check can be carried out by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

After eliminating a fault, to check the system completely, an authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if necessary certain road tests.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

☐ ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
☐ If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

2. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

3. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

4. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

Vertical sequence of nine gray icons representing transportation, security, vehicle, and data analytics functions

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, be sure to adjust the seat, the interior rear view mirror, and the door mirrors, and fasten the seat belt correctly.

Never press the accelerator pedal before starting the engine.

If necessary, messages indicating the starting procedure will be shown in the display.

WARNING!

□ When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
□ Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
☐ Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the Electric Park Brake and set the gear selector to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
2. Fully press the brake pedal without touching the accelerator.
3. Briefly push the ignition button.
4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the procedure.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

☐ Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
☐ Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle ↩ page 199. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

Remote Starting System

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of at least 300 feet (91 meters).

The remote starting system also activates the climate control, the heated seats (if equipped), and the heated steering wheel (if equipped), depending on temperatures outside and inside of the vehicle.

NOTE:

Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.

How to use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

□ Gear selector
□ Doors closed.
□ Hood closed.
□ Trunk closed.
□ Hazard switch off.
□ Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed).
□ Battery at an acceptable charge level.
□ PANIC button not pushed.
□ System not disabled from previous remote start event.
□ Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing.
□ Ignition in the OFF mode.
☐ Fuel level meets minimum requirement.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.

These features will stay on through the duration of remote start also until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation — If Equipped

When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 39^ F ( 4^ C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.

Exiting remote start will resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active.

The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.

Cold Weather Operation

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than -22^ ( -30^ ) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externally-powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from an authorized dealer.

The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5^ F ( -15^ C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.

CAUTION!

Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.

Extended Park Starting

If the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days, it is advisable to follow the indications below.

To start the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the ignition button
2. If the engine does not start, wait five seconds and let the starter cool down and then repeat the starting procedure
3. If the engine does not start after eight attempts, let the starter cool down for at least 10 seconds, and then repeat the starting procedure

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficult starting, that can be noticed through rapid fatigue of the starter, might also be due to a discharged battery. In this case you may jump start the vehicle ↩ page 199.

If Engine Falls To Start

Starting the Engine with Key Fob Battery Run Down or Drained

If the ignition does not respond when the button is pushed, the key fob battery might be run down or drained. Therefore, the system does not detect the presence of the key fob in the vehicle, and will display a dedicated message.

For more information on starting with a discharged key fob battery ↩ page 19.

WARNING!

☐ Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
☐ Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
☐ If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle ↕ page 199. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

After Starting — Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows:

□ Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
☐ It is recommended to wait until the digital engine coolant temperature indicator starts to rise for maximum performance.

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic.
2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.
3. With engine idling, push the ENGINE START/STOP button on the steering wheel to STOP the engine.

NOTE:

Do not leave the ignition in ACC mode when the engine is off.

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the ignition will be placed in the ACC mode

With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to leave the vehicle taking the key fob with you without the engine switching off. The vehicle will inform the absence of the key on board, only if the doors are closed.

Stopping the engine (cycling from the ACC to the OFF position), the accessories are still powered for about three minutes, or until a door is opened.

When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this function.

After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting off the engine.

Turbocharger Cool Down

It is recommended before switching the vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a few minutes so that the turbocharger can be suitably lubricated. This procedure is particularly recommended after severe driving.

After a full load operation, keep the engine idling for three to five minutes before switching it off.

This time allows the lubricating oil and the engine coolant to eliminate the excessive heat from combustion chamber, bearings, inner components and turbocharger.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0^ F ( -18^ C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20^ F ( -29^ C), the engine block heater is required.

Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (access door on the passenger side wiper cowl).
2. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
3. After the vehicle is running, properly stow away behind access door on the passenger side wiper cowl.

NOTE:

☐ The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from an authorized dealer.
☐ The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
☐ The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have a warming effect on the engine and at least four hours to have a warming effect when ambient temperatures are below -20^ F ( -29^ C).

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

Engine Break-In

For both engines, use the following engine break-in recommendations:

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in period and not interpreted as an indication of a problem. Please monitor your oil level during the break-in period and add oil as required.

It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:

0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):

☐ Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.
☐ Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
□ Avoid aggressive braking.
☐ Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
□ Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):

☐ Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).
□ Avoid aggressive braking.
□ Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
□ Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

☐ Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPM when possible.
☐ Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
□ Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):

☐ Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km).

NOTE:

Monitor engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through the first oil change interval.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)

The EPB features a switch located on the center console, a caliper with motor for each rear wheel, and an electronic control module.

Close-up of a mechanical control panel with no visible text or symbols

Electric Park Brake Switch

The EPB can be engaged in two ways:

□ Manually, by pulling the switch on the center console.
□ Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto Park Brake" conditions.

NOTE:

Normally, the EPB is engaged automatically when the engine is stopped. This function can be deactivated/activated on the Information and Entertainment system by selecting the following items in sequence on the main menu: "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Parking Brake".

In addition to engaging the EPB, along with steering and positioning chocks in front of the wheels (when on a steep slope), you must always place the vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery must be replaced in order to unlock the EPB.

Engaging The EPB Manually

Briefly pull the switch located on the center console to manually engage the EPB when the vehicle is stationary.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle when engaging the EPB.

A slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected when engaging the EPB with the brake pedal pressed.

With the EPB engaged, the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel and the switch will illuminate.

CAUTION!

With the EPB failure warning light on, some functions of the EPB are deactivated. In this case the driver is responsible for brake activation and vehicle parking in complete safety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, the use of the brake is required with the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the center console pulled as long as the brake action is necessary.

The BRAKE warning light may turn on with the hydraulic system temporarily unavailable; in this case braking is controlled by the motors.

The brake lights will also automatically turn on in the same way as for normal braking with the use of the brake pedal.

Release the switch on the center console to stop the braking action with the vehicle in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle is braked until a speed below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept pulled, the parking brake will definitively engage.

NOTE:

Driving the vehicle with the EPB engaged, or using it several times to slow down the vehicle, may cause severe damage to the braking system.

Disengaging The EPB Manually

In order to manually release the parking brake, the ignition should be in the ACC mode. Press the brake pedal, and then push the switch on the center console briefly.

Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle, and a slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected during disengagement.

After disengaging the Electric Park Brake, the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel and the light on the switch will turn off.

If the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel remains on with the EPB disengaged, this indicates a fault: in this case, contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
□ Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
□ Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
□ Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of the EPB. Always engage the EPB when parking the vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused by the unexpected movement of the vehicle.

Electric Park Brake (EPB) Operating Modes

The EPB may operate as follows:

☐ "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode is activated by pulling the switch repeatedly while driving.
☐ "Static Engagement and Release Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the EPB can be activated by pulling the switch on the center console once. Push the switch and the brake pedal at the same time to disengage the brake.
☐ “Drive Away Release”: the EPB will automatically disengage with the driver side seat belt fastened and the detection of an action performed by the driver to move the vehicle (forward gear or reverse gear). This feature can be turned on or off in the Information and Entertainment System.

NOTE:

If the car is equipped with carbon-ceramic brake discs, it is necessary to fasten the seat belts or turn off the EPB before starting to avoid damages to the ceramic brake discs.
☐ “Safe Hold”: if the vehicle speed is low than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear selector is not in PARK (P) position and the driver's intention of leaving the vehicle is detected, the EPB will automatically engage to hold the vehicle in safety conditions.

☐ "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the EPB will automatically engage when the gear selector is in PARK (P) position. The light on the switch located on the center console switches on together with the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel when the parking brake is engaged and applied to the wheels. Each automatic parking brake engagement can be canceled by pressing the switch on the center console and at the same time moving the gear selector for the transmission to position PARK (P).

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function that automatically engages the Electric Park Brake in the event of a dangerous condition for the vehicle.

The Electric Park Brake engages automatically to prevent vehicle movement if:

☐ The vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h).
☐ A transmission operating mode different from PARK (P) is activated.
☐ The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
☐ The driver side door is open.
☐ No attempts to apply pressure on the brake pedal have been detected.
☐ The vehicle is parked on roads with a slope of more than 4%.

The “Safe Hold” function can be temporarily disabled by pushing the switch located on the center console and the brake pedal at the same time, with the vehicle stationary and the driver side door open.

Once disabled, the function will activate again when the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to OFF and then to ACC.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 8-speed automatic transmission where gear shifting automatically takes place, depending on the vehicle usage instantaneous parameters (vehicle speed, grade, and accelerator pedal position).

Manual gear shifting can still occur thanks to the “sequential mode” position for the gear selector.

WARNING!

☐ It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
□ When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

☐ Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
☐ Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
☐ Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Display

The following information is shown on the dedicated area of the display:

☐ In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P, R, N, D) with "D" as the current gear number.

☐ In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): the mode (M) with the current gear and the double or single gear shift request, use both up and down (single or double arrow).

D AUTO 12:36 PM SOM 10 mph 75936 mi 583 mi D

Gear Display

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and service categories, including cars, vehicles, roads, and charts.

Gear Selector

The gear functioning is controlled by the gear selector, which can assume the following positions:

□ P = PARK
□ R = REVERSE
□ N = NEUTRAL
□ D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed)
☐ AutoStick: using + manually shift to higher gear; - to manually shift to lower gear

The positions diagram is illustrated on the top of the gear selector.

R N D M + 1 2

Gear Selector Center Console

1 - Gear Selector
2-PARK(P) Button

The letter corresponding to the mode selected on the gear selector lights up and appears on the instrument cluster display.

To select a mode, move the gear selector forward or backwards, together with pressing the brake pedal and gear selector button to engage REVERSE (R).

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a red key inserted, no visible text or symbols

Gear Selector
3 — Gear Selector Button

The gear selector is a joystick style shifting mechanism which returns to the center position automatically. It can be pushed forward twice and rearward twice, based on the starting condition.

The PARK (P) mode can be enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK (P) button.

To transition the vehicle into REVERSE (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) mode, it is necessary to move the gear selector by pushing the gear selector button.

When using AutoStick to change gears, move the gear selector left from DRIVE (D) and then forward toward the - symbol or backward toward the + symbol and the gear is changed.

To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or stopped, and the brake pedal must also be pressed.

NOTE:

☐ DO NOT accelerate while shifting from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to another position.
□ After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This precaution is particularly important with a engine cold.

Transmission Operating Modes

PARK (P)

The transmission is locked in this mode. The engine can be started in this mode.

NOTE:

Never try to engage PARK (P) mode when the vehicle is moving. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode is engaged (letter P shown on the display and gear selector) and that the parking brake is engaged.

When parking on a flat surface, first engage the PARK (P) mode and then engage the Electric Park Brake.

When parking uphill, before activating the PARK (P) mode, engage the Electric Park Brake. Otherwise, it could be difficult to engage the (P) mode.

To check that the PARK (P) mode is actually engaged, make sure (P) is illuminated on the display and on the gear selector.

WARNING!

□ Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
☐ Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
☐ It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
☐ When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

☐ Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must push the ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF mode to the ON mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
☐ DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

REVERSE (R)

Select this mode only with the vehicle at a standstill.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the Electric Park Brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P) if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

DRIVE (D)

Use this mode in normal driving conditions.

Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or REVERSE (R) modes must take place only after releasing the accelerator pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal pressed.

This mode ensures automatic engagement of the most suitable gears for driving needs and maximum fuel economy in terms of consumption.

In this position, the transmission shifts the gears automatically, selecting the most suitable for forward driving among those available as you go. This ensures the vehicle's optimal driving characteristics are provided for all conditions.

AutoStick

In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for sport driving, when the vehicle is driven with a heavy load or on slopes), it is recommended to use the Autostick (sequential shifting) mode to select and keep a lower fixed ratio.

In these conditions, the use of a lower gear improves vehicle performance, preventing overheating.

It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) mode to sequential mode regardless of vehicle speed.

Activation

Starting from DRIVE (D), move the selector to the left (- and + indication of the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode. The gear engaged will be shown on the display.

Shifting is made by moving the gear selector forwards, towards symbol - or backwards, towards symbol +.

Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If Equipped

The gear can also be manually shifted by using the paddles behind the steering wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and release it to engage a higher gear, and perform the same operation with the left paddle (-) to engage a lower gear.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Steering Wheel Shift Paddles

NOTE:

If only one manual shift is necessary, the letter (D) will remain on the display with the engaged gear next to it.

Deactivation

To deactivate the sequential driving mode, bring the gear selector back in position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving mode).

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

NOTE:

☐ To select the correct gear for maximum deceleration (engine brake), just keep the gear paddle pulled (-): the transmission goes to an operating mode in which the vehicle can slow down easily.
☐ The vehicle will keep the gear selected by the driver until the safety conditions allow it.
☐ This means, for example, that the system will try to prevent the engine from switching off, automatically downshifting if the engine speed is too low.

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated.

In this condition, the transmission stays in FOURTH gear, regardless of the selected gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) still work.

The symbol might light up in the instrument cluster.

Temporary failure

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns off.
4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could reoccur. If the transmission cannot be reset, service is required at an authorized dealer.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System

This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.

This system prevents you from moving the gear selector from position PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.

To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Disabling Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing systems) inhibit the automatic activation of PARK (P) mode when stopping the engine, or proceed as described below:

1. Vehicle at a standstill.
2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated.
3. Push the ignition button for at least three seconds.

The automatic parking brake engagement function when the engine is stopped can also be deactivated on the Information and Entertainment system by selecting the following functions on the main menu: "Settings",

"Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Parking Brake".

Important Notes

Failure to comply with what is reported below may damage the transmission:

☐ Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the vehicle at a standstill.
☐ Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass from REVERSE to another mode only with the vehicle at a standstill and engine idling.
☐ Do not change between PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) modes with engine running at a speed above idling.
☐ Before activating any transmission operating mode, fully press the brake pedal.

NOTE:

The unexpected movement of the vehicle can injure the occupants or people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running: before getting out of the passenger compartment always engage the Electric Park Brake, select the PARK (P) mode and stop the engine.

WARNING!

☐ It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
☐ Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
☐ When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
☐ Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

☐ Only engage the gear with engine at idling while fully pressing the brake pedal. If the transmission temperature exceeds the normal operating limits, the transmission control unit may change the gear engagement order and reduce the drive torque. If the transmission overheats, it could operate incorrectly until it cools down.
☐ When using the vehicle with extremely low external temperatures, the transmission operation may change depending on the engine and transmission temperature, as well as vehicle speed. Activation of the torque converter clutch and of the EIGHTH gear is inhibited until the transmission oil is correctly warmed up. Complete operation of the transmission will be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature reaches the predefined value.

This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA system selector (located on the center console). There are four modes of operation to be selected according to driving style and road conditions:

Close-up of a mechanical control panel with a red circular knob and adjustment knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Alfa DNA System Selector

□ d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).
☐ n = Normal (mode for driving in normal conditions).
☐ a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving mode for maximum fuel savings).
☐ RACE = track race driving mode (if equipped).
☐ = Adjusts the calibration of the active suspension (Quadrifoglio only).

When the engine is stopped, the selector returns to "n" (Normal) mode.

The symbol of the active mode lights up in red on the selector.

On the instrument panel display, the different modes are characterized by different colors:

□ Normal - Blue
□ Dynamic - Red
□ Advanced Efficiency - Green

ID 3▲ NW 12:36 PM 26 °F MPH 0 mpg 25 50 75 12:536 08 283 08

Mode Display

Each driving mode is graphically different on color line and contents of each individual "performance" screen.

Driving Modes

"Dynamic" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "d"; the displays light up in red.

ID AUTO 12:36 PM 3▲ NW 26 °F MPH d1 mag 25 50 70 75936 mH 583 + dB

Dynamic Mode

ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, sportier driving while guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.

"Electronic Q2" system: the system is calibrated to increase traction while accelerating on turns, improving the agility of the vehicle.

Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping.

WARNING!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

3 12:36 PM NW 26 °F 0.47 peak g 75936 mi 583 * mi

Dynamic Mode Performance Display

The “Performance” screen displays parameters related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed on the right.

"Normal" Mode

"Normal" Mode is the default mode when the vehicle is started up.

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "n"; the displays light up in blue.

3 12:36 PM NW 26 °F MPW 0 mpg 75 75936 mi 583 * mi

Natural Mode

Engine and transmission: standard response.

The “Performance” screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption.

Natural Mode Performance Display

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "a"; the displays light up in green.

3 12:36 PM NW 26 °F MPH 0 75 75936 mi 583 mi

Advanced Efficiency Mode

ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is advisable to select

"Advanced Efficiency" mode in the presence of low-grip road surfaces.

"Electronic Q2" system: the system is deactivated.

There will be reduced engine performance.

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode is characterized by reduced engine performance and ECO shifting strategy for the automatic transmission.

The "Performance" screen graphically displays some parameters closely related to the vehicle: acceleration, deceleration, and gear selector.

12:36 PM mph 26.5°F 75936 ms 583 ms

Diagram showing three labeled components (1, 2, 3) with curved arrows and a cross symbol inside, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical system.

Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display

1 - Acceleration
2 - Deceleration
3-Gear Selector

NOTE:

☐ The vehicle will always start up in NORMAL mode as a default.

"RACE" Mode (Quadrifoglio Only)

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector to position "RACE"; the displays light up in yellow.

ID M1 SHIFT M1 race 75936 mi 583 MHz

RACE Mode

Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping.

WARNING!

☐ It is recommended to activate this mode at the track.
☐ In "RACE", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

The "Performance" screen displays parameters related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.

The screen displays the lateral and longitudinal acceleration peaks.

M1 46 MPH 0.47 0.47 1.12 0.47 race G-Force 16 ml NW

RACE Mode Performance Display

NOTE:

If the brake system overheats, this is communicated by the Information and Entertainment system. In this case, allow the system to cool for a few minutes by driving the vehicle normally without operating the brakes.

Deactivation

To deactivate the RACE mode, rotate the selector to the RACE position again and the system will be set to "d" Dynamic mode.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED

The system continuously monitors the damping of the suspension through the actuator installed on each shock absorber. The calibration of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the conditions of the road surface and to the dynamic conditions of the vehicle, improving its comfort and road handling.

The driver can choose, while driving, (only in "d" or "RACE" mode), between two types of suspension calibration: a more sporty or a more comfortable type.

By pushing the button, the system prepares the shock absorber calibration in order to favor driving comfort.

Close-up of a car's internal control panel with a red indicator light and four buttons (no text or symbols visible)

"Alfa DNA" System Selector

In case of a system failure, the symbol and a dedicated message will be shown on the instrument cluster display.

STOP/START SYSTEM

Stop/Start System

The Stop/Start system automatically shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.

The function was developed to increase vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel consumption, gas emissions, and sound pollution.

Operating Mode

Stopping the Engine

With vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal pressed, the engine switches off if the gear selector is in a position other than REVERSE (R).

The system does not operate when the gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to make parking maneuvers easier.

In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine).

NOTE:

The engine can only be automatically stopped after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the engine.

Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol lighting up on the instrument cluster display.

Restarting the Engine

To restart the engine, release the brake pedal or turn the steering wheel slightly (if equipped).

With the brake pressed and the transmission in automatic mode DRIVE (D), the engine will restart by shifting to REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to "AutoStick".

With the brake pressed while the gear selector is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by moving the selector to + or -.

System Manual Activation/Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate the system, push the button located in the control panel on the left of the steering wheel.

The activation of the system is indicated by the Ⓐ symbol lighting up on the display. In this condition, the light on the button is off.

System Deactivation

A message will appear on the display when the system is deactivated. In this condition, the light on the button is on.

NOTE:

Each time the engine is started, the system is activated regardless of where it was when it was previously switched off.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

For higher comfort and increased safety, and to reduce emissions, there are certain conditions where the engine will not autostop despite the system being active, such as:

□ Engine still cold.
□ Especially cold outside temperature.
□ Battery not sufficiently charged.
□ Driver's door not shut.
□ Driver's seat belt not fastened.
☐ Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking maneuvers).

☐ With the automatic climate control active an adequate cabin heating or cooling comfort has not been reached or with MAX-DEF function active.

□ During the first period of use, to initialize the system.

□ Steering angle beyond threshold.

Engine Restarting Conditions

Due to comfort, emission control and safety reasons, the engine can restart automatically without any action by the driver, under special conditions, such as:

□ Battery not sufficiently charged.
□ Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on roads with a grade).
□ Engine stopping by the Stop/Start system for more than approximately three minutes.
□ With the automatic climate control active an adjustment in cabin heating or cooling is made or with MAX-DEF function active.

Safety Functions

When the engine is stopped through the Stop/Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt, opens the driver's or passenger's door, or opens the hood from inside the vehicle, the engine can be restarted only by using the ignition.

This condition is indicated to the driver both through a buzzer and a message on the instrument cluster display.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency response, and safety measures

Irregular Operation

In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Start system is deactivated.

For further information on failure indications ▷ page 73.

Vehicle Inactivity

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the battery is replaced), special attention must be paid to the disconnection of the battery power supply.

Proceed as follows:

Remove connector from socket to disconnect sensor (battery status monitoring) installed on the negative pole of the battery. This sensor should never be disconnected from the pole except if the battery is replaced.

Interior view of a vehicle showing three numbered components (1, 2, 3) with no visible text or symbols.

Battery Power Supply

1 - Socket
2 - Sensor
3 - Connector

NOTE:

After setting the ignition to OFF and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition is in the OFF mode and the driver side door is closed.

SPEED LIMITER

Description

This feature allows the driver to program the maximum speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:

The maximum set speed can be exceeded by continuing to press the accelerator pedal.

The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30 km/h).

When this feature is active, the vehicle speed depends on the pressing of the accelerator pedal until the programmed speed limit is reached ↗ page 105.

Activation

The feature can be activated/deactivated through the radio system.

Activating The Device

To access this feature, select the "Driver Assistance" widget in the radio system, then select the following items in sequence:

1. "Speed Limiter"

2. "ON"

The activation of this feature is signaled by the illumination of the green Speed Limiter icon, along with the last speed set, in the instrument cluster display. The Speed Limiter feature can remain active concurrently with the Cruise Control system. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the Cruise Control is selected, the Cruise Control speed will be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This function remains available in RACE mode.

D 12:36 PM 72.5 °F 70 LIM PH 16 mi 360 mi

Speed Limiter Display

Speed Limit Programming

The speed limit can be programmed through the radio system.

To access the function on the main menu, select the following items in sequence:

1. "Driver Assistance"

2. "Speed Limiter - Set Speed"

By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increases by 5 mph (8 km/h), from a minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

Exceeding The Programmed Speed

By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, the programmed speed can be exceeded even with the device active (e.g. in the event of overtaking).

The device is disabled until the speed drops below the set limit, after which it reactivates automatically.

Programmed Speed Icon Flashing

The programmed speed will flash in the following scenarios:

☐ When the accelerator pedal has been fully pressed and the vehicle has exceeded the programmed speed.

□ Activating the system after setting a limit below the effective speed of the vehicle.

☐ In the event of overtake acceleration.

Deactivation

The feature can be activated/deactivated through the radio system.

Deactivating The Device

To access this feature, select the "Driver Assistance" widget in the radio system, then select the following items in sequence:

1. "Speed Limiter"

2. "OFF"

Automatic Deactivation Of The Device

The device deactivates automatically in the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer.

Temporary Signal Loss

When the device loses the signal, the white symbol without the speed indication illuminates on the display.

System Failure

If there is a system failure, the amber symbol illuminates on the display.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Cruise Control — If Equipped

When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).

Interior view of a car dashboard with a red 'BMW' logo and control knob (no readable text or symbols)

Cruise Control On/Off Switch

The Cruise Control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed the same.

NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

WARNING!

Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Activate

To activate the Cruise Control system, push the on/off button location on the left side of the steering wheel.

The activation of the system is signaled by the illumination of the white warning light on the instrument cluster.

12:36 PM 72.5 °F MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Cruise Control Indicator Light

The Cruise Control function can remain active at the same time as the Speed Limiter System. If the set speed is higher than the speed set with the Speed Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter.

For Quadrifoglio vehicles, this function remains available in RACE mode.

NOTE:

The system cannot be engaged in FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using the AutoStick feature.

WARNING!

Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always ensure the system is OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

To set a desired speed, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the Cruise Control on.

2. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET switch up or down and release to activate. When the accelerator is released, the vehicle will maintain the selected speed automatically.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a red indicator switch and control knob (no visible text or symbols)

SET Switch Location

If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate beyond the set speed by pressing the accelerator. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

When traveling downhill with the system active, the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the set one.

NOTE:

Before pushing the SET switch, the vehicle must be traveling at a constant speed on a flat surface.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed

When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase the speed by pushing the SET switch upward or decrease the speed by pushing the SET switch downward.

U.S. Speed (mph)

☐ Pushing the SET switch once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent movement of the switch results in an adjustment of 1 mph.

☐ If the switch is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the switch is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

□ Pushing the SET switch once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent movement of the switch results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
☐ If the switch is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the switch is released, then the new set speed will be established.

NOTE:

Moving the SET switch allows for adjusting of the speed according to the selected unit of measurement set on the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual for more information.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Cruise Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.

WARNING!

Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

NOTE:

Before resuming the previously set speed, you must accelerate to a speed close to that speed.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, infotainment knob, and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Resume Button Location

In AutoStick (sequential) mode, before resuming the previously set speed, you should accelerate until you are close to that speed. Then, push and release the RES button.

To Deactivate

A tap on the brake pedal deactivates the Cruise Control without deleting the set speed.

The Cruise Control may also be deactivated by applying the Electric Park Brake or when the braking system is operated (e.g. operation of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system).

The set speed is deleted in the following cases:

□ Pushing the on/off button a second time
☐ The ignition is placed in the OFF position
□ If there is a malfunction with the Cruise Control

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver assist system that combines the Cruise Control functions with controlling the distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC increases the driving convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function performs differently ➤ page 105.

ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC uses a radar sensor located behind the front bumper and a camera located in the center/upper part of the windshield, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead.

The system sets and holds the vehicle at the desired speed without needing to press the accelerator. It also sets and holds a distance from the vehicle ahead (these settings are set by the driver).

Front view of a white car's head and grille (no visible text or symbols)

Front Bumper Radar Location

Interior view of a vehicle's internal compartments and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Windshield Camera Location

If the system detects a vehicle ahead, it will automatically intervene by slightly braking or accelerating in order to maintain the preset distance. It will not exceed the original set speed when adapting to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

NOTE:

Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guaranteed under the following circumstances, and it is recommended to turn the system off when:

□ Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.
□ Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones.
☐ Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, roads with steep inclines, or roads with numerous turns and bends.
□ Entering a turn lane.
☐ When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed ↗ page 273.

WARNING!

□ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

□ The ACC system:

• May react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle) at speeds between 2 mph and 35 mph (4 km/h and 60 km/h).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle for approximately two minutes in the stop position. If the vehicle ahead does not start moving within two minutes, the parking brake will be activated and the ACC syst em will be canceled.

You should switch off the ACC system:

□ When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
☐ When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
□ When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 19 mph (30 km/h) and the maximum is 110 mph (180 km/h).

The system cannot be activated:

□ When pressing the brake pedal.
□ When the brakes are overheated.
□ When the Electric Park Brake has been operated.
□ When either PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL is engaged.

☐ When the engine RPM is above a maximum threshold.

□ When the vehicle speed is not within the operational speed range.

☐ When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (or Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) or other stability control systems) are operating or have just operated.

□ When the ESC system is off.

□ When the Forward Collision Warning system (if equipped) is braking automatically.

☐ In the event of a system failure.
□ When the engine is off.
☐ In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (in this case the bumper area where it is located must be cleaned).

If the system is set, the conditions described above also cause a cancellation or deactivation of the system. These situations may vary according to the conditions.

NOTE:

The system will not be deactivated when speeds higher than those set are reached by pressing the accelerator pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In these situations, the system may not work correctly and it is recommended to deactivate it.

To Activate/Deactivate

The system has four operating states:

□ Enabled (speed not set)
□ Activated (speed set)
□ Paused
□ Deactivated

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as driving, weather, car, and search

To Activate

To enable the system, push and release the on/off button located on the left side on the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, battery, and control panel (no readable text or symbols)

On/Off Button

When the system is enabled and ready to operate, the display shows the white ACC icon above dashes in place of the speed.

12:36 PM 72.5 °F MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Enabled Icons

Setting a speed activates the system. The display shows the icon in green with the set speed.

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

To Pause/Deactivate

With the feature enabled (speed not set), push the on/off button to disable.

With the feature active (speed set), push the on/off button to pause. The display will show the icon in white with the speed in brackets. To deactivate the feature, push the on/off button a second time.

To Set A Desired Speed

When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, push the RES/SET switch downward and release it to activate the system. When the accelerator is released, the vehicle will maintain the set speed automatically.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

SET Switch

While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the system will not be able to control the distance between the vehicle and the one ahead. In this case, the speed will be determined only by the position of the accelerator pedal.

The system will return to normal operation as soon as the accelerator pedal is released.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed

Once the system has been activated, you can increase the speed by pushing the RES/SET switch upward or decrease the speed by pushing the RES/SET switch downward. Each time the switch is pushed, the speed is adjusted by 1 mph.

Pushing and holding the switch upward or downward will cause the set speed to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

□ Moving the RES/SET switch downward allows you to adjust the speed according to the selected unit of measurement ("U.S." or "Metric") set on the radio system. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for further information.
☐ When the unit of measurement is set to Metric, pushing and holding the RES/SET switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h increments.
- By keeping the accelerator pedal pressed, the vehicle can continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. In this case, use the RES/SET switch to set the speed to the vehicle's current speed.
☐ When you push the RES/SET button to reduce the speed, the braking system intervenes automatically if the engine brake does not slow the vehicle down sufficiently to reach the set speed. The device holds the set speed uphill and downhill; however a slight variation is entirely normal, particularly on slight inclines.
☐ The transmission could shift to a lower gear when driving downhill, or when accelerating. This is normal and necessary to maintain the set speed.
☐ The system will disable while driving if the brakes overheat.

To Resume

Once the system has been canceled but not deactivated, to resume a previously set speed, simply push the RES/SET switch upward and remove your foot from the accelerator to recall it. The system will be set to the last stored speed.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

Setting The Distance Between Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (short), two bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars (maximum).

Four-panel grid showing car icons with green leaf symbols and numbers 22, likely indicating vehicle status or sensor settings.

Distance Icons

The distances from the vehicle ahead are proportional to speed.

The interval of time with relation to the vehicle ahead remains constant and varies from one second (for the short distance one-bar setting) to two seconds (for the maximum distance four-bar setting).

The set distance is shown on the display by a dedicated icon.

The setting is four bars (maximum) the first time the system is used. After the distance has been modified by the driver, the new distance will be stored even if the system is deactivated and reactivated.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as driving, weather, traffic, and search functions

To Decrease The Distance

Push and release the distance button to decrease the distance setting. The distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the button is pushed.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Distance Button

The set speed is held if there are no vehicles ahead. Once the shortest distance has been selected, the next push of the button will set the maximum distance.

If a slower vehicle is detected in the same lane, the vehicle icon on the display illuminates from grey to white. The system automatically adjusts the vehicle's speed to keep the set distance, independently of the set speed.

The vehicle holds the set distance until:

☐ The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed higher than the set speed.
☐ The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control system sensor.

☐ The distance setting is changed.
☐ The Adaptive Cruise Control system is deactivated/paused.

WARNING!

☐ The maximum breaking applied by the system is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed.
☐ If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, either "BRAKE!" or a dedicated message is displayed to warn the driver of approaching the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
☐ The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objects along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries.
☐ The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country.

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle at a speed greater than 45 mph (70 km/h), the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

The system detects the direction of traffic automatically when the vehicle passes from left hand traffic to right hand traffic. In this case, the overtaking assist function is only active when the reference vehicle is overtaken on the right. The additional acceleration is deactivated when the driver uses the right direction indicator and returns to the original lane.

"Stop And Go" Function

The "Stop and Go" operating strategy allows you to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle has completely stopped.

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.

If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver will have to push the RES/SET switch upward to restart.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the set speed is canceled if:

☐ The on/off button is pushed (when the system is on or paused).
☐ The ignition is placed in the OFF position
☐ RACE mode is activated (Quadrifoglio models)

The system is canceled (the set speed and distance are stored):

□ When the system is paused→ page 109
☐ When the conditions shown in the "Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" section occur → page 109

Limited Operation Warning

If the dedicated message is shown on the display, a condition limiting the Adaptive Cruise Control operation may have occurred.

This could be due to an obstruction of the vehicle's sensor or camera. It could also be due to a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield opposite the interior rearview mirror, where the camera is located, as well as the area of the front bumper where the sensor is located. Then check that the message has disappeared.

When the conditions limiting the system functions end, normal operation will resume.

Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. The following are examples of these types of situations:

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

☐ On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. In this case, it is advisable to deactivate the system.
☐ The system only limits the speed DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.

Diagram showing a car driving on a curved road with a vehicle approaching (no text or symbols)

Turn Or Bend Example

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

NOTE:

The driver must maintain control of the vehicle, remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if needed.

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane changing example below, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Top-down diagram of three cars on a road with a light ray indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Top-down view of a car with a person projecting a light beam through it, on a road (no text or symbols visible)

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

The ACC system can detect stationary vehicles when the vehicle is traveling at speeds between 2 mph and 35 mph (4 km/h and 60 km/h). The driver should always be attentive and be ready to press the brakes if necessary.

Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

The system cannot detect the presence of objects or vehicles traveling in opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate ▶ page 273.

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a directional arrow indicating light or perspective (no text or symbols)

Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

IFETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766

Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Radio Frequency Exposure Information

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

The Highway Assist System (HAS) is a driving assistance system that is only available when driving on highways. The system operates up to speeds of 90 mph (145 km/h) when horizontal signs are detected.

The system uses information from the front camera and radar to help keep the vehicle in the center of the lane and at a constant speed.

The HAS system combines Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions with lane centering logic to control the trajectory of the vehicle. The HAS system requires the driver's hands to remain on the steering wheel.

Once HAS is activated, a dedicated screen will appear on the instrument cluster display.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and charts.

To Activate/Deactivate

To Activate

To activate the HAS system, push the button located on the left side of the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and a red warning sign (no readable text or symbols)

Highway Assist Button

Suspension Conditions

The following operations will suspend the HAS system:

□ Steer manually
□ Press the brake pedal
□ Disable the ACC device
□ Activate the turn signals
☐ Push the ACC activation setting button for two seconds to activate Cruise Control
☐ Place the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL

Reactivating the ACC system will reactivate HAS ➤ page 107.

Automatic Deactivation

The system can be deactivated in any of the following situations:

□ If there are narrow bends
□ When hands are removed from the steering wheel
☐ If the left or right turn signal is activated
☐ If the driver intentionally changes lanes without using the turn signal
□ If the driver's seat belt is released
☐ If the gear selector is placed in DRIVE
☐ If the "Active Braking" function is activated → page 151
□ If the vehicle exits the highway
☐ If the lane markings are not detected by the camera
□ If the ACC device is deactivated
☐ If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)

NOTE:

□ When the HAS system is turned off, the symbol on the display turns red and then grey.
☐ Hands on the steering wheel are detected by a capacitive sensor installed in it.

When the automatic suspension conditions are over, HAS will be automatically reactivated.

Operation

The HAS system only operates when the driver's hands are on the steering wheel.

If the system detects that the driver's hands have been removed from the steering wheel, the system will alert the driver to place their hands back on the steering wheel page 117.

If the vehicle crosses the lane boundary, the steering wheel will vibrate and the dedicated screen will appear in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

The HAS system may take up to five seconds to turn on once all conditions are met. During this time, a grey indicator light will appear on the instrument cluster display and the system will automatically activate as soon as all of the conditions are met with no intervention from the driver.

The following conditions must be met before the HAS system turns on:

☐ The HAS system must be enabled by pushing the button on the steering wheel
☐ The vehicle must be on a highway
□ ACC must be activated

☐ The right and left lane boundaries must be visible
☐ The vehicle speed must be between 0 and 90 mph (0 and 145 km/h)
☐ The camera, radar, and radio system must be functioning properly
☐ The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft and 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)
☐ The turn signals must not be activated
☐ The HAS system must be functioning properly

Other operating limits:

☐ If the speed of ACC can be set to a higher value (top speed 110 mph (180 km/h), HAS is only available as long as the vehicle speed is equal to or less than 90 mph (145 km/h).

☐ When the ACC speed is reduced and the vehicle speed is less than 90 mph (145 km/h), the system will automatically reactivate.

☐ If the ACC speed is set to 90 mph (145 km/h), traveling downhill may increase the vehicle speed. The HAS system will deactivate until the speed returns to 90 mph (145 km/h).

Indications On The Display

The HAS system status can always be viewed in the instrument cluster display.

The system status is indicated by the color of the symbol on the display.

The HAS system uses sensors in the steering wheel to detect if the driver's hands are on it. If the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel, a series of warnings will appear in the instrument cluster display to alert the driver to reposition their hands on the steering wheel. An acoustic signal will also sound. After a period of time, the HAS system will disable if the driver's hands do not return to the steering wheel.

After a period of time, the HAS system will disable if the driver has not repositioned their hands on the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect hands on the steering wheel, it will warn the driver by displaying a dedicated screen on the instrument cluster display.

System Status

Active System

When the system is active, the screen below will appear in the "Driver Assistance" menu on the instrument cluster display.

D 12:36 PM 50 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi +P

HAS Active

If on a different menu screen, a symbol will appear on the instrument cluster display indicating that the system is active.

When the driver's hands are removed from the steering wheel, the system disables after a few seconds. A screen will appear in the instrument cluster display warning the driver to return their hands to the steering wheel.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as car, phone, sun, dashboard, and search.

Active System (Hands Removed From The Steering Wheel For A Short Time)

As soon as the driver removes their hands from the steering wheel, the screen below will appear in the instrument cluster display. The system will remain active at this time.

12:36 PM 50 MPH 78 °F 16 mi 360 mi +2

Hands Removed Initial Warning

If the driver does not return their hands to the steering wheel within a few seconds, the screen below will appear in the instrument cluster display.

12:36 PM 50 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi

Hands Removed Secondary Warning

Active System (Hands Removed From The Steering Wheel For A Long Time)

If the driver still has not returned their hands to the steering wheel after the screen above is displayed, the below screen will now appear in the instrument cluster display, and an acoustic signal will sound until the driver regains control of the vehicle.

3D D 12:36 PM 50 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi

Hands Removed Final Warning

If the driver's hands are not returned to the steering wheel after an extended period of time, a deactivation message will appear on the instrument cluster display. The steering wheel control will be deactivated.

This display will remain active even when the driver's hands are removed from the steering wheel. The symbol on the display will turn grey.

The ACC system and Lane Departure Warning systems will also be disabled.

When HAS is active, the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)/ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems (if equipped), if previously activated, will remain activated.

Limited System Availability/Operation

System Availability

External factors and conditions may affect the proper operation of the HAS system, such as:

□ Narrow, winding, curvy streets
□ Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.)
□ Front lights of oncoming vehicles or direct sunlight or shade
□ Damage or obstructions caused by mud, ice, snow, etc.
□ Bumper damaged or not aligned
□ Interference with other equipment that causes electromagnetic waves
□ Presence of roadwork/road construction sites
☐ If the indications given by the navigation system (if any) of the radio system are not yet ready and/or if the navigation system is recalculating the route

System Limited Operation

The HAS system may have limited or reduced functionality when one of the following conditions occur:

☐ Lane markings are not clear or in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.)
☐ Either the camera or radar are damaged covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
☐ When driving on hills or roads with narrow bends
□ Near highway toll booths
☐ When the highway entrance or exit is wider than 20 ft (6 m)
☐ If the camera is exposed to glare caused by reflections or direct sunlight
☐ If the navigation system information is unavailable or being recalculated

NOTE:

☐ If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too narrow with respect to the current speed, the HAS system will disable.
☐ If damage to the windshield occurs, have the windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

□ Always remain alert and be ready to take control of the vehicle in the event that the HAS system disables.
□ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when the HAS system is activated.
□ Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and pay attention to traffic conditions.
☐ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) which could interfere with the hand detection sensor.

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) system can be activated on all road types. The system uses a camera to detect lane markings and keep the vehicle in the center of the lane.

When the system is unable to detect lane markings, it will still operate using surrounding traffic. This can occur in congested traffic scenarios, when the vehicles ahead or surrounding obstruct the visibility of the lane markings. When the speed is below 12 mph (20 km/h), the system can use a lock-on strategy that allows the vehicle to automatically follow the vehicle ahead.

The TJA system combines Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions with Lane Departure Warning functions to maintain vehicle speed and steering wheel behavior.

NOTE:

Do not use the TJA system while driving in urban areas.

To Activate/Deactivate

To activate the system, push the button on the left side of the steering wheel.

To deactivate the system, push the button again.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

Traffic Jam Assist Button

Suspension Conditions

The following operations will suspend the TJA system:

□ Pressing the brake pedal
□ Opening the driver's door
□ Disabling ACC
☐ If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h)
□ Releasing the driver's seat belt
□ Placing the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL
☐ If the Forward Collision Warning system or "Active Braking" intervenes

Automatic Deactivation

System operation will be temporarily disabled under the following conditions:

□ When traveling around narrow bends
□ If the lane boundaries are not detected
☐ One of the two lines is interrupted
☐ The sun is low and reflects on the radar camera
□ If the turn signals are activated
☐ If the driver intentionally changes lanes without using the turn signal

☐ If manual steering begins
□ If the driver's hands are removed from the steering wheel
□ When there is no surrounding traffic and there are no horizontal lane boundaries
☐ If the system is not functioning properly
□ If lateral acceleration is high

NOTE:

□ When TJA is turned off, the symbol in the instrument cluster display will turn red, and then grey.
☐ A sensor in the steering wheel detects whether the driver's hands are placed on the steering wheel.

When the automatic suspension conditions are over, the TJA system will be automatically reactivated.

Operation

The TJA system can only operate when the driver's hands are on the steering wheel.

If the system detects that the driver's hands have been removed from the steering wheel, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display to alert the driver to place their hands back on the wheel.

NOTE:

☐ If the vehicle begins to cross the lane boundary, the steering wheel will vibrate and a dedicated screen will appear in the instrument cluster display.
☐ The TJA system may take up to five seconds to become active once all conditions are met.

The following conditions must be met in order to activate the system:

☐ The TJA system must be enabled
☐ The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system must be turned on
☐ The right and left lane boundaries must be recognized by the system
☐ The vehicle must be traveling at a speed between 0 and 37 mph (0 and 60 km/h)
☐ The camera, radar, and radio system must be functioning properly
☐ The road lane width must be between 8.5 ft and 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)
☐ The turn signals must be turned off
☐ The TJA system must be functioning properly
☐ If the ACC speed is set to 37 mph (60 km/h) or less, traveling downhill may increase the vehicle speed. The system will remain inactive until the speed returns to 37 mph (60 km/h) or less.

Indications On The Display

The TJA system status is indicated by the color of the symbol in the instrument cluster display. The system uses sensors in the steering wheel to detect if the driver's hands are present. If the driver's hands are removed, a series of warnings will appear in the instrument cluster display to alert the driver to reposition their hands on the steering wheel. Acoustic signals will also be emitted.

If the driver's hands are not returned to the steering wheel after a period of time, the system will be disabled.

System Status

Active System

An active system is indicated by the following screen in the "Driver Assistance" menu on the instrument cluster display.

D 12:36 PM 30 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi +

TJA System Active

Active System (Hands Removed From The Steering Wheel For A Short Time)

The following screen will appear in the instrument cluster display immediately after the driver's hands are removed from the steering wheel. The system still remains active at this time.

D 12:36 PM 30 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi +D

Hands Removed Initial Warning

If the driver does not return their hands to the steering wheel within a few seconds, the following screen will appear in the instrument cluster display.

12:36 PM 30 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi +D

Hands Removed Secondary Warning

Active System (Hands Removed From The Steering Wheel For A Long Time)

If the driver's hands have still not been returned to the steering wheel, the following screen will appear in the instrument cluster display.

12:36 PM 30 MPH 78 °F d 16 mi 360 mi +

Hands Removed Final Warning

An acoustic signal will sound until the driver regains control of the vehicle (hands on steering wheel). The system is still active at this time.

If the driver's hands are not returned to the steering wheel after a period of time, a deactivation message will appear on the instrument cluster display and the steering wheel control will be deactivated.

Once the indicator light on the display turns grey, the system is no longer active and the driver must take control of the vehicle. At this time, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system and Lane Departure Warning system will also be disabled.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as driving, weather, car, and inspection

When the TJA system is active, the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems (if equipped) will be temporarily disabled. When TJA is not active, the LKA system → page 130 and LDW system → page 128 will remain active.

Limited System Availability/Operation

System Availability

Performance of the TJA system may be affected by the following factors:

□ Narrow, winding, curvy streets
☐ Lane boundaries that are not clear or in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.)
☐ If the camera is exposed to glare from direct sunlight or headlights of an oncoming vehicle
☐ If the camera or sensor is damaged, covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
☐ The bumper is damaged or misaligned
□ Interference with other equipment causes electromagnetic waves
□ Construction sites
☐ If the indications given by the navigation system of the radio system are not yet ready or if the system is recalculating

System Limited Operation

The TJA system may have limited or reduced functionality when one of the following conditions occurs:

☐ Lane boundaries are not clear or in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.)
☐ Either the camera or radar are damaged covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
☐ When driving on hills or narrow bends
□ Near highway toll booths
☐ When the highway entrance or exit is more than 20 ft (6 m) wide
☐ If the camera is exposed to glare from reflections or direct sunlight

NOTE:

☐ If damage to the windshield occurs, have the windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
☐ If the vehicle approaches a bend that is too narrow with respect to the current speed, the TJA system will deactivate.

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

□ Always remain alert and be ready to take control of the car in the event that the TJA system disables.
□ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when the TJA system is activated.
- Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and pay attention to traffic conditions.
☐ The TJA system should only be used as a driving aid. The drive must always pay attention to their surroundings when the system is operating and be ready to take control of the vehicle at any time.
☐ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) that could interfere with the hand detection sensor on the steering wheel.

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system uses a camera mounted on the windshield to detect recognizable road signs such as:

□ Speed limits
□ Signs indicating the end of the situations indicated above

If the camera does not detect valid speed limits, the radio system navigation system may suggest unregulated speed limits.

The system always checks the traffic signs indicating the current speed limit signs. The system is able to recognize and display up to two different road signs in the instrument cluster display.

Depending on the unit of measurement (km or mph) set through the "Unit of Measurement" menu in the radio system, the TSR system will automatically show the indication of the road sign in the unit of measurements selected in the instrument cluster display.

To Activate/Deactivate

The TSR System can be activated/deactivated in the radio system in the "Driver Assistance" menu. The system activation is signaled by road signs shown on the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

☐ By selecting "Blinking", the driver can activate a warning to display when the speed exceeds the limit indicated by the TSR System. The speed road sign on the instrument cluster display will blink until the vehicle speed drops below the displayed limit.
☐ Selecting "Offset" will set the speed at which "Blinking" is activated up to a maximum of 6 mph (10 km/h) above the limit detected by the system.
☐ If no speed limit signs are found, the system will revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the NAV system.

Indications On The Display

The system status can always be viewed through the instrument cluster display.

The instrument cluster display shows only the speed limit indications and consists of the following steps:

☐ The new speed limit recognized by the system, which is indicated by means of a predetermined color. The road sign indicating the end of the speed limit or a "Road Sign Not Detected" message may appear in this zone.
□ After a predetermined distance, the previously displayed road sign changes color to inform the driver that the speed limit provided may no longer be valid.

12:36 PM D 50 55 55 2.5 °F 1 50 MPH SPEED LIMIT 55 SPEED LIMIT 55 16 mi 360 m

1 — Traffic Sign Recognized

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

□ Always remain alert and be ready to take control of the vehicle in the event that the TJA system disables.
□ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when the TJA system is activated.
□ Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and pay attention to traffic conditions.

CAUTION!

☐ Functionality may be limited or the system may not work if the sensor is obstructed.
☐ The system may have limited operation or not work at all in weather conditions such as heavy rain, hail, thick fog, and low temperatures. Strong light contrasts can influence the recognition capability of the sensor.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ The area surrounding the sensor must not be covered with stickers or any other object.
☐ Do not tamper or perform any operations in the area of the windshield glass directly surrounding the sensor.
□ Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings, insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield.

INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Intelligent Speed Control (ISC) system is always paired with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. The ISC system suggests an automatic speed adjustment to the driver based on the speed limit for the road being traveled. The driver can decide whether to accept or reject the automatic speed adjustment, using the switch on the steering wheel. If the speed limit is exceeded according to the road signs or traffic conditions, a dedicated graphic message is displayed on the instrument panel display.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a red switch and 'START STOP' button (no visible text or symbols)

RES/SET Switch

To Activate/Deactivate

To Activate

The system can be activated in the radio system within the "Driver Assistance" menu. The symbol illuminates in the instrument cluster display when the system is active.

D 12:36 PM 50 MPH 16 mi 380 m SPEED LIMIT 55 SPEED LIMIT 55 SPEED LIMIT 55 12.5 °F

1 - ISC System Active

To Deactivate

The system is deactivated under the following conditions:

☐ When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system is deactivated
☐ When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is deactivated

NOTE:

Selecting "Speed Offset" allows the driver to set the speed up to a maximum of 6 mph (10 km/h) above or below the suggested speed set by the ISC system. In this instance, the road sign information shown in the instrument cluster display will continue to be detected by the TSR system.

Indications On The Display

The system status is indicated by a white or green icon in the instrument cluster display (similar to the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) device) to the left of the road sign indications provided by the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system.

Acceptance/Rejection Of The Suggested Speed

The system can be activated if the driver has activated the following systems beforehand:

□ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
□ Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

When these systems are active, a telltale will display in the instrument cluster display indicating the suggested speed provided by the TSR system. The driver has the option to accept or reject this using the RES/SET switch on the steering wheel.

To accept the proposed speed and adjust the speed set by ACC, move the RES/SET switch up or down in the direction indicated in the tell-tale.

To reject the proposed speed, move the RES/SET switch up or down in the direction opposite of the arrow in the telltale. The ACC system will continue to regulate to the previously set speed.

If the speed set by the ACC system is the same as the speed detected by the TSR system, the speed limit indicator on the instrument cluster display will be highlighted with a green circle.

D 12:36 PM 72.5 °F 1 50 MPH 50 ↑ 40 ms 360 mi

1 — Suggested Speed Higher Than Current Speed

12:36 PM 72.5 °F 2 60 ↓ PH 16 mi 360 mi

2 — Suggested Speed Lower Than Current Speed

12:36 PM D 50 MPH 16 mi 360 m SPEED LIMIT 55 SPEED LIMIT 55 2.5 °F 1

1 —Road Sign Recognized

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.

When the REVERSE gear is engaged and the system is on, the front and rear sensors are activated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, the rear sensors are deactivated, while the front sensors remain active until the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.

NOTE:

In certain operating conditions, the system could start detecting an obstacle only after the vehicle has moved slightly (a few inches).

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, and equipment.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

☐ The ParkSense System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity
☐ The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense System in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense system.

ParkSense Sensors

The ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia/bumper and (if equipped) in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. These sensors detect the presence of any obstacles and warn the driver through an acoustic signal and visual indications, which will be displayed on the instrument cluster display.

Front view of a white car with visible grille and red corner markers (no text or symbols)

Front Sensor Location

Side view of a white car's rear bumper with visible red arrows indicating side features (no text or symbols)

Rear Sensor Location

ParkSense Display

The driver can select the type of warning they would like to be displayed through the radio system. To access the function on the main menu, select in the following order:

1. "Settings"
2. "Driver Assistance"
3. "ParkSense"
4. "Mode"
5. "Sound and Display"

Visual Indications

The system indicates the presence of an obstacle by displaying a single red arc in the detected area, in relation to the distance of the object and the position of the vehicle.

If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear central area, a single red arc will be displayed as the obstacle approaches, first constant, then flashing, in addition to an acoustic signal. If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear left and/or right area, a single red flashing arc will be shown in the corresponding area on the display and the system will emit an acoustic signal, either at frequent intervals or constantly.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstacle when a single red flashing arc is shown on the display and the acoustic signal becomes continuous.

If several obstacles are detected simultaneously in the front and rear area, the display will show all of them, regardless of the area in which they were detected.

It is not possible to exit from the display screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.

Acoustic Signal

In the presence of an obstacle at the front or the rear of the vehicle, an acoustic signal with variable frequency will sound:

☐ The acoustic signal increases in frequency as the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle decreases.
☐ The acoustic signal becomes continuous when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the distance increases.
☐ The acoustic signal is constant if the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is unchanged.

NOTE:

If the sensors detect several front and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle is considered. An intermittent signal will sound if the obstacles are at the same distance (front and rear).

When the system emits an acoustic signal, the volume of the radio system, if activated, is automatically lowered.

An acoustic signal will not sound if the vehicle is in PARK.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

For vehicles only equipped with rear sensors, to turn the system off, push the ParkSense button located to the left of the headlight switch. The indicator light within the button will illuminate when the system is turned off. Pushing the button a second time will turn the system back on, and the indicator light will turn off.

Pmin OK

ParkSense On/Off Switch

For vehicles equipped with front and rear sensors, to turn the front parking sensors off, push the ParkSense button located to the left of the headlight switch. The indicator light within the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. Pushing the button a second time will turn the front sensors back on, and the indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

Deactivation of both the front and rear parking sensors can only be done through the radio system.

The indicator light within the ParkSense system switch will also be on in case of system failure. If the switch is pushed with a system failure, the indicator light will flash for approximately five seconds. The light will then stay on constantly.

NOTE:

When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ParkSense system keeps the last state when the engine was stopped (activated or deactivated) in its memory.

ParkSense Warning Display

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a message on the instrument cluster display ➤ page 73.

In case of system failure, a dedicated message appears on the instrument cluster for about five seconds.

□ Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: If the display shows a message requiring the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that the outer surface and the underside of the front and rear bumpers are free of debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear, place the ignition in the OFF position, then return it to ON/RUN. If the message is still displayed, contact an authorized dealer.

□ Audio System Not Available: If the display shows a message that the audio system is not available, it means that the acoustic signal will be emitted by the instrument panel, and not through the vehicle's speakers.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

Some conditions may influence the performance of the ParkSense system:

☐ Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or thick paint on the surface of the sensor.
☐ The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo interference) due to mechanical interference, for example when washing the vehicle or in extreme weather.
☐ The signals sent by the sensors can be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.
☐ System performance can be influenced by the position of the sensors. For example, due to a change in the ride setting (caused by wear to the shock absorbers or suspension), by changing tires, overloading the vehicle or operations that require the vehicle to be lowered.

☐ Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other adhesives over the sensors as this will affect system performance.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Lane Departure Warning Operation

The Lane Departure Warning system uses a forward looking camera located on the windshield to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.

When one or both lane limits are detected and the vehicle passes over one without an activated turn signal, the system emits a visual as well as an audible signal.

If the vehicle continues to go beyond the line of the lane without any intervention from the driver, the surpassed line will light up on the display (left or right) to urge the driver to bring the vehicle back into the limits of the lane.

CAUTION!

□ Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle may interfere with the correct operation of the camera. Before starting, make sure the load is correctly positioned in order to not cover the camera operating range.
☐ Do not cover the operating range of the camera with stickers or other objects.
☐ Do not tamper with nor operate on the camera. Do not close the openings in the aesthetic cover located under the interior rearview mirror. In the event of a failure of the camera, contact an authorized dealer.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.
☐ Camera operation may also be compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions.
☐ If the windshield must be replaced due to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is advisable to replace the windshield if it is damaged in the area of the camera.

Turning Lane Departure Warning On Or Off

The system is activated/deactivated by pushing the button located on the end of the multifunction lever, or through the "Driver Assistance" widget though the radio system.

Close-up of a black handheld electronic device with control buttons and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

Lane Departure Warning System Activation/Deactivation Button

NOTE:

The Lane Departure Warning system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

Activation Conditions

Once turned on, the system becomes active only if the following conditions are met:

☐ The vehicle speed is equal to or above 37 mph (60 km/h) (the system is deactivated at speeds equal to or greater than 110 mph (180 km/h)).

☐ The lane markings are visible at least one side.
☐ There are suitable visibility conditions.
☐ The road is straight or with wide radius bends.
☐ A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front.
☐ The turn signal is not active.

Lane Departure Warning Message

The Lane Departure Warning system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.

When the system is on and the lane markings have not been detected, the display shows two grey lane lines.

ID 12:36 PM NW 72.5 °F 50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Lane Markings Not Detected

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

When the system is active and only, for example, the left lane marking has been detected, the detected lane illuminates in white on the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings on the display in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane (turn signal not activated) to the left.

ID 12:36 PM **** 72.5 °F /50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi +8

Left Lane Marking Detected

When the system detects that the vehicle has approached the lane marking and is about to pass it, the left line on the display illuminates in yellow.

ID 12:36 PM NW 72.5 °F 50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Left Lane Marking Approached

The system operates in the same way, but mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

When the system is active, both lane lines on the display illuminate in white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. When lane markings are detected, the system is ready to provide indications in case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated).

As the Lane Departure Warning system detects the lane markings while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display accordingly (from white to yellow and vice versa, and increase their thickness).

If a lane line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an audible signal as well as the visual indication in the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane marking which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle is exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible signal will come from the speakers on the left of the vehicle).

Limited Operation Warning

If a message appears on the display, a condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have occurred. This could be an obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the system.

If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield by the interior rearview mirror.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may not function properly.

When the conditions limiting the system are corrected, it will go back to normal operation. Should a fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Warning

If the system turns off and the warning light! appears on the display, it means that there is a system fault.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle, but you are advised to contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Changing Lane Departure Warning Status

The system's sensitivity can be set through the radio system. Sensitivity "High" or "Low" can be selected.

To access the function, from the main menu select the following in order:

1. "Settings"
2. "Driver Assistance"
3. "Lane Departure Warning"
4. "Sensitivity"

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system uses a camera located on the windshield to detect the lane markings and calculate the position of the vehicle within such markings, in order to make sure that the vehicle remains inside the lane. This is an active system that will apply torque to the steering wheel if it senses that the vehicle is drifting out of the lane.

When one or both lane markings are detected and the vehicle passes over one without a turn signal being applied, the system will apply torque to the steering wheel and a visual signal will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. An audible signal may also sound.

If the vehicle continues to go beyond the lane line without any driver intervention, the surpassed lane line (left or right) will light up on the instrument cluster display to urge the driver to bring the vehicle back inside the lane limits.

D 12:36 PM 30 26.5 °F mph 7 75936 mi 583 mi +1

Lane Crossed

Turning Lane Keeping Assist On Or Off

The system is activated/deactivated by pressing the button at the end of the multifunction lever. Each time the engine is started, the system maintains the operating mode that was selected when it was previously turned off.

P≤ D R

Activation/Deactivation Button

Activation Conditions

Once the activation button is pushed, the system becomes active only if the following conditions are met:

☐ The car speed is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h). (The system is deactivated at speeds equal to or higher than 110 mph (180 km/h))
☐ The lane limit lines are visible at least on one side
☐ There are suitable visibility conditions
☐ The road is straight or with wide radius bends

☐ A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front
☐ The turn signal (to indicate leaving the lane) is not active

Lane Keeping Assist Warning Message

The Lane Keeping Assist system also advises the driver when the car changes lanes by showing symbols and messages on the instrument cluster display.

The message at the top of the display remains active only until the main reconfigurable area of the display is activated by pressing the TRIP button located on the end of the windshield wiper lever ↩ page 68.

After activating the main reconfigurable area, the Lane Keeping Assist system messages will be shown in the instrument cluster display.

When the system is active and the lane markings have not been detected, the display shows two grey lane lines.

12:36 PM NW 72.5 °F 50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Lane Markings Not Detected

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

When the system is active and only, for example, the left lane marking has been detected, the detected lane lights up in white on the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings on the display in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane (turn signal indicator not activated) to the left.

ID 12:36 PM **** 72.5 °F /50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi +1

Left Lane Marking Detected

When the system detects that the vehicle has approached the lane marking and is about to pass it, the left line on the display lights up in yellow.

ID 12:36 PM NW 72.5 °F 50 MPH 16 mi 360 mi

Left Lane Marking Approached

NOTE:

The system operates in the same way, but mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

When the system is active, both lane lines on the display illuminate in white to indicate the successful detection of both limits.

When lane markings are detected, the system is ready to provide indications in case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated).

As the Lane Keeping Assist system detects the lane markings while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display accordingly (from white to yellow and yellow to white, and increase their thickness).

If a lane line is crossed, the driver is alerted by an audible signal as well as the visual indication in the instrument cluster. The signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane marking which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicle is exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible signal will come from the speakers on the left of the vehicle).

Hands Presence On The Steering Wheel Detection

The system is able to detect the presence of the driver's hands on the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect the presence of hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds (up to 6 seconds), the following screen will be displayed on the instrument cluster display. No acoustic warning will be emitted in this case.

P 12:36 PM 26 °F 7 75906 mi 583 mi

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence of hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds (from 6 to 15 seconds), the following screen will be displayed on the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic signal will sound if hands are not detected on the steering wheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A continuous signal will sound if hands are not detected on the steering wheel for 12 to 15 seconds.

P 12:36 PM 26°F 75906 mi 583 mi

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removed from the steering wheel, the LKA system will be deactivated and a dedicated message will be shown on the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic signal will sound in this case.

In any of the situations above where the hands are removed from the steering wheel for more than 6 seconds, it is necessary to reposition the hands on the steering wheel.

Changing The System Sensitivity

The system's sensitivity can be set through the radio system in the "Driver Assistance" menu. Sensitivity "Early" or "Late" can be selected.

Changing The System Strength

The system's strength can be set through the radio system in the "Driver Assistance" menu. Strength "Low" or "High" can be selected.

Limited Operation Warning

If a message appears on the display, a condition limiting the LKA system operation may have occurred. This could be an obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the system.

If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield by the interior rearview mirror.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may not function properly.

When the conditions limiting the system are corrected, it will go back to normal operation. Should a fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and appears on the display, it means that there is a system fault.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle, but you are advised to contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

□ Projecting loads on the roof of the vehicle may interfere with the correct operation of the camera. Before starting, make sure the load is correctly positioned, in order not to cover the camera operating range.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ If the windshield must be replaced due to scratches, chips or breakage, contact an authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own; there is risk of malfunction. It is advisable to replace the windshield if it is damaged in the area of the camera.
☐ Do not tamper with or operate on the camera. Do not close the openings in the aesthetic cover located under the interior rearview mirror. In the event of a failure of the camera, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
☐ Do not cover the operating range of the camera with stickers or other objects. Also pay attention to other objects on the hood (e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they do not interfere with the camera.
☐ The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ Camera operation may also be compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), or road surface conditions and driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as driving, weather, traffic, and inspection

REAR BACK UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES

The Rear Back Up Camera is located just under the vehicle's trunk lid, above the rear license plate.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a circular button and red accent stripe (no text or symbols visible)

Rear Back Up Camera Location

Camera Activation/Deactivation

The Rear Back Up Camera can be activated and deactivated through the radio system by selecting the "Settings" option on the menu.

Once the Rear Back Up Camera is activated, choose from one of the following options:

□ "Activate"
□ "Switch-Off Delay"
□ "Camera Guidelines"

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the radio system display will show the area behind the vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back Up Camera, along with a warning message.

Top-down view of a red car with sensor detection bounding boxes, showing front and side views (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Rear Back Up Camera Display

When enabled in the radio settings, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Area	Distance From The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red	0-11.8 inches(0-30 cm)
Yellow	11.8 inches to 3.3 feet(30 cm-1 m)
Green	3.3 feet or more(1 m or more)

Messages On The Display

If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will not detect any obstacle behind the vehicle. The display will show a dedicated warning message.

Make sure the trunk lid is closed by pushing next to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

□ Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface clean, and free from debris.
□ When parking, be aware of obstacles that may be above or under the camera range.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

☐ To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
☐ To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up Camera.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Refueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel type is correct.

Also, stop the engine before refueling.

NOTE:

An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus contributing to air pollution.

CAUTION!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter beyond repair.

Refueling Procedure

The fuel filler door is unlocked when the central door locking system is unlocked. It is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.

Opening The Fuel Filler Door

To refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pushing on the point shown by the arrow.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a red circular badge and white arrow pointing to the center (no text or symbols visible)

Fuel Door

1. Remove the fuel filler cap.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe.

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency, traffic, and inspection.

1. When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, before removing the nozzle, wait for at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank.
2. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas cap about a quarter turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened.

The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).

FUEL

Fuel Door Label

Emergency Fuel Door Opening

In the event of an emergency, the fuel filler door can be opened by operating from inside the trunk.

Proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk and locate the emergency fuel filler release cap on the inside lining.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a red object near the center and a magnified inset highlighting a red, irregularly shaped object (no text or symbols visible)

Fuel Door Release Cap

1. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside to unlock the fuel filler door.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on it (see the previous instructions).

WARNING!

□ Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
☐ A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

NOTE:

If the filler compartment is washed with a pressure washer, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm).

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various operational or safety-related categories, including cars, radios, vehicles, and charts.

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing is not recommended for this vehicle.

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING

Saving Fuel

Below are some suggestions which may help you save fuel and lower the amount of harmful emissions released into the atmosphere.

Vehicle Maintenance

Checks and operations should be carried out in accordance with the Maintenance Plan page 204.

Tires

Check the tire pressures at least once every four weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher.

Unnecessary Loads

Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. The weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability.

Electric Devices

Use electrical systems only for the amount of time needed. The rear window defroster, additional headlights, windshield wipers and heater blower fan require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).

Climate Control System

Using the climate control system will increase consumption: use standard ventilation when the temperature outside permits.

Devices for Aerodynamic Control

The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic control may adversely affect air drag and consumption levels.

Driving Style

Starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs when the vehicle is stationary; this causes the engine to warm up more slowly, thereby increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable to drive off immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds: by doing this the engine will warm up more quickly.

Unnecessary Actions

Avoid revving up when starting at traffic lights or before stopping the engine. This action is unnecessary and causes increased fuel consumption and pollution.

Gear Selection

Use a high gear when traffic and road conditions allow it. Using a low gear for faster acceleration will increase fuel consumption.

Improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear.

Max. Speed

Fuel consumption considerably increases as speed increases. Maintain a constant speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently severely affects consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual and should not exceed the maximum torque.

Conditions Of Use

Cold Starting

Short trips and frequent cold starts will not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results in a significant increase in consumption levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) and emissions.

Traffic And Road Conditions

High fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic, for instance when traveling in traffic with frequent use of low gears or in cities with many traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and rough road surfaces also adversely affect consumption.

Stops In Traffic

During prolonged stops (e.g. railway crossings), turn off the engine.

Transporting Passengers

WARNING!

☐ It is extremely dangerous to leave children in a parked vehicle when the temperature outside is very high. The heat inside the passenger compartment may have serious, or even fatal, consequences.
□ Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In the event of an accident, anyone inside the trunk would be at greater risk of serious or even fatal injury.
☐ Ensure that all the occupants of the vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and that any children are positioned correctly on the dedicated child restraint systems.

Transporting Animals

The intervention of the airbags may be dangerous for an animal on the front seat. It is therefore advised to arrange animals on the rear seat inside dedicated cages restrained by the vehicle's seat belts.

Keep in mind that, in the event of a sudden braking or an accident, an inadequately restrained animal may be projected within the passenger compartment, risking injury to the animal itself and the other occupants of the vehicle.

Exhaust Gas

Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, and may be lethal. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which can cause fainting and poisoning if inhaled.

To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take the following measures:

☐ Do not keep the engine running in closed spaces.
☐ If, for some reason (e.g. transporting bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with the trunk open, close all the windows and run the climate control fan at maximum speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation mode.
☐ Should it be necessary to stay in the stationary vehicle with engine running, adjust the ventilation/heating system and operate the fan in such a way that outside air will enter the passenger compartment. Activate the maximum fan speed.

Maintenance of the exhaust system provides the best protection against leaks of carbon monoxide into the passenger compartment.

Should an unusual noise from the exhaust system or the presence of exhaust gas in the passenger compartment be identified, or if the underbody or rear section of the vehicle is damaged, have the entire exhaust system and bodywork areas checked to identify any

components which are broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position. If any of these things occur, contact an authorized dealer.

Open welding or loose connections may permit exhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment.

Check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change operations. Replace the components if necessary, contact an authorized dealer.

Performance — Quadrifoglio

This vehicle is equipped with an engine capable of delivering exceptionally fast acceleration and speed:

☐ Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 RPM.
☐ Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at 2500–5000 RPM.
☐ Top speed: 191 mph (307 km/h).
☐ Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h): 3.8 seconds.

For safe driving, it is essential, particularly during the first days of use, to get to know the car by driving carefully and gradually discovering its performance.

Brakes

The car braking system may be available with four carbon-ceramic material brake discs, one on each wheel.

In order to guarantee the maximum braking capacity for the first use, Alfa Romeo performs a “run-in” procedure for discs and pads directly at the factory.

The use of carbon-ceramic material brake discs guarantees braking features (better deceleration/pedal load ratio, braking distances, fading resistance) proportional to the dynamic features of the car in addition to considerably decreasing the unsprung component weight.

The materials used and the structural features of the system could generate unusual noises which have absolutely no adverse effect on correct operation and reliability of the braking system.

Greater pressure may need to be applied to the brake pedal the first time to keep the same braking capacities in presence of condensation or salt on the braking surfaces, for example after washing or if the car is not used for a long time.

NOTE:

Given the high technological level of this system, any servicing on it must be performed by an authorized dealer which exclusively has the skills needed for the repair and maintenance operations.

In case of intensive, high-performance use of the car, have the efficiency of the carbon-ceramic material braking system inspected as shown on the Maintenance Plan at an authorized dealer.

Driving On Race Tracks

Before driving on a track using a racing style, it is necessary to:

□ Attend a race track driving course.
☐ Check all liquid levels in the engine compartment.
□ Have the car inspected at an authorized dealer.

Remember that the car was not designed to be driven exclusively on the race track and that this use increases stress and component wear.

NOTE:

Quadrifoglio front brakes are equipped with NAO type pads (Non-Asbestos Organic). These pads are NOT suitable for high thermal loads (for example track use). If you want to use vehicle on a track it is recommended to use the optional CCM Brakes (Carbon Ceramic Brake disc).

Preheating The Carbon Ceramic Material Brake Discs (If Equipped)

The brake discs must be warmed up to make them fully efficient. You are advised to perform the following procedure to achieve optimal efficiency:

☐ Brake nine times from 80 mph to 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with deceleration equal to 0.7g (the longitudinal acceleration value is shown on the instrument panel display by setting RACE mode and selecting the "Performance" page) with 20 second intervals between brake applications; keep the car at a speed comprised between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and do not brake for 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool down.

☐ Brake three times from 124 mph to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS operation) with 30 second intervals between brake applications; keep the car at a speed comprised between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the brakes to cool down.

This very important section describes the safety systems that your vehicle may be equipped with, and provides instructions on how to use them correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The vehicle may be equipped with the following active safety devices:

□ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
□ Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)
☐ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
□ Drive Train Control (DTC)
□ Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
□ Hill Start Assist (HSA)
□ Panic Brake Assist (PBA)
□ Traction Control System (TCS)

For the operation of the systems, see the following pages.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

An integral part of the braking system, the ABS prevents one or more wheels from locking and slipping in all road surface conditions, regardless of the intensity of the braking action. The system ensures that the vehicle can be controlled even during emergency braking, allowing the driver to optimize stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking when the wheels are about to lock, typically in emergency braking or low-grip conditions where locking may be more frequent.

The system also improves control and stability of the vehicle when braking on a surface where the grip of the left and right wheels varies, such as in a corner.

The Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front and rear wheels.

System Intervention

The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with the "Brake-by-wire" (Integrated Brake System — IBS) function. With this system, the command given by pressing the brake pedal is not transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the pedal with the traditional system is no longer noticeable.

WARNING!

☐ The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
☐ The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
☐ The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
□ The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Row of grayscale icons representing various service or operational categories, including car, sun, helmet, and tools.

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) — If Equipped

The dynamic drive control is used to optimize and balance the drive torque between the wheels of the same axles. The ATV system improves the grip in turns, sending more drive torque to the external wheel.

Given that, in a turn, the external wheels of the car travel more than the internal ones and therefore turn faster, sending a higher thrust to the external rear wheel allows for the car to be more stable and to not suffer an "under steer" condition. Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

DST uses the integration of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system with the electric power steering to increase the safety level of the whole vehicle.

In critical situations (braking on surfaces with different grip conditions), the ESC system controls the steering through the DST function to implement an additional torque contribution on the steering wheel in order to suggest the most correct maneuver to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakes and steering increases the sensation of safety and control of the vehicle.

NOTE:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver's sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.

Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If Equipped

Some models of this vehicle are equipped with an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, which offers an optimal drive for countless driving conditions and road surfaces. The system reduces the slipping of the tires to a minimum, automatically redistributing the torque to the front and rear wheels as needed.

To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with AWD automatically passes to Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) when the road and environmental conditions are such that they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. When the road and environmental conditions require better traction, the vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode.

NOTE:

If the system failure symbol switches on, after starting the engine or while driving, it means that the AWD system is not working properly. If the warning message activates frequently, it is recommended to carry out the maintenance operations.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC system improves the directional control and stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle's understeer and oversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the engine can also be reduced in order to maintain control of the vehicle.

☐ Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is turning more than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel.
☐ Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning less than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel.

The ESC system uses sensors installed on the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to follow and compares it with the vehicle's effective path. When the real path deviates from the desired path, the ESC system intervenes to counteract the above conditions.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is indicated by the flashing of the ESC warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical.

WARNING!

□ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
□ Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

This is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes, activating automatically in the following cases:

☐ Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than REVERSE (R) engaged.
☐ Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and REVERSE gear engaged.

When starting to move forward from a complete stop, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right foot to be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

The system will automatically deactivate after two seconds without starting, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, it is possible to hear a typical mechanical brake release noise, indicating the imminent movement of the vehicle.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as car, email, vehicle, and search

Panic Brake Assist (PBA)

The PBA system is designed to improve the vehicle's braking capacity during emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking by monitoring the speed and force with which the brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the braking distance: the PBA system therefore complements the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the PBA system is obtained by pressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake pedal should be pressed continuously during braking, avoiding intermittent presses, to get the most out of the system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until braking is no longer necessary.

The PBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal is released.

WARNING!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a PBA-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The TCS automatically operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on one or both drive wheels on roads that are slippery, snowy, icy,

etc. Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated:

☐ If the slipping involves both drive wheels the system intervenes, reducing the power transmitted by the engine.
☐ If the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) function is activated, automatically braking the wheel which is slipping (the behavior of a self-locking differential is simulated). This will increase the engine torque transferred to the wheel which isn't slipping.

System Intervention

The intervention of the system is indicated by the flashing of the ESC warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

The following auxiliary driving systems are available in this vehicle:

☐ Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
☐ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
□ Driver Attention Assist (DAA)

The vehicle may also be fitted with the following driving assistance systems:

☐ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
□ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
□ Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
□ Highway Assist System (HAS)
□ Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)
□ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
□ Intelligent Speed Control (ISC)
□ Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

For the operation of the LDW, LKA, HAS, TJA, ACC, ISC, or TSR systems, see ➔ page 86.

NOTE:

When driving on two-way roads where there is no lane dividing center line (e.g. on unpaved roads), the use of the Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA), HAS, TJA, and LKA systems is strongly discouraged as the system could detect the entire road as single-lane dividing lines.

NOTE:

The driving assistance systems are designed to aid in driving the car. The driver must always maintain a sufficient level of attention to the traffic and road conditions and control the trajectory of the car.

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System — If Equipped

The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper (one on each side), to detect the presence of other vehicles in the rear side blind spots of your vehicle.

3D model of a car's rear bumper with arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

Rear Sensor Location

The system warns the driver about the presence of other vehicles in the detection area by illuminating the BSM Warning Light located within the door mirror on the side in which the other vehicle was detected. If equipped, an audible chime will also be heard to alert the driver (if option is selected within the radio system).

Side view of a car with a circular emblem and a red triangle marker on the side (no text or symbols)

BSM Indicator Light

When the engine is started, the warning light illuminates briefly to signal the driver that the system is active.

Sensors

The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged.

The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is in PARK.

The detection area of the system covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle.

This area begins from the door mirror and extends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear part of the vehicle.

When the sensors are active, the system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the vehicle and warns the driver about the possible presence of vehicles in these areas.

While driving, the system monitors the detection zone to check whether it is necessary to send a signal to the driver on both sides. The system monitors this detection zone in three different situations:

□ When you are being overtaken by a vehicle.
□ When you are overtaking a vehicle.
□ When a vehicle approaches from the side.

NOTE:

☐ The system does not alert the driver of the presence of fixed objects (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of these objects. This is normal and does not indicate a system malfunction.
☐ The system does not alert the driver about the presence of vehicles coming from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes.
☐ If a trailer is hitched to the car, the system automatically deactivates.

Row of gray icons representing various activities including car, email, steering wheel, family, traffic, vehicle, gear, search, and control.

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear View

The system detects vehicles coming from the rear part of your vehicle on both sides and entering the rear detection area with a difference in speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h) in relation to your vehicle.

Overtaking Vehicles

If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, with a difference in speed of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side illuminates.

If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light does not illuminate ➕ page 273.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System

The RCP system assists the driver during reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced visibility.

The RCP system monitors the rear detection areas on both sides of the vehicle to detect objects moving toward the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots.

The system activation is signaled to the driver by an audible warning.

NOTE:

☐ If the sensors are covered by objects or vehicles, the system may not work as intended.
☐ For the system to operate correctly, the rear fascia/bumper area where the radar sensors are located must stay free from snow, ice and dirt gathered from the road surface.
☐ Do not cover the rear fascia/bumper area where the radar sensors are located with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Operating Mode

The system may be activated/deactivated via the radio system. To access the function, select the following items on the main menu in sequence:

1. "Settings"

2. "Safety"

3. "Blind Spot Alert"

"Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" Mode

When the system is enabled, the warning light within the door mirror on the side of the detected object illuminates.

The visual warning on the mirror will blink if the driver activates the turn signals, indicating a lane change.

The warning light will be constant if the driver stays in the same lane.

"Blind Spot Alert" Function Deactivation

When the system is deactivated ("Blind Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP systems will not emit an audible or a visual warning.

The BSM system will store the operating mode that was active when the engine was stopped. Each time the engine is started, the operating mode stored previously will be recalled and used.

Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) System — If Equipped

The Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) system function is to help avoid/limit lateral collisions with cars located in the blind spot zones, even changing the vehicle's trajectory in order to keep it in the detected lane.

The system warns the driver about the presence of other vehicles in the detection area by illuminating the warning light located within the door mirror on the side in which the other vehicle was detected and by means of an acoustic signal and/or vibration on the steering wheel and/or counter-steering torque on the steering wheel (if the respective item on the "Driver Assistance" menu is set up and then selecting "Safety" on the radio system).

When the engine is started, the warning light illuminates briefly to signal the driver that the system is active (the warning light comes on even if the system is activated through the radio system menu).

Close-up of a car's front wheel with a red triangular highlight on the side (no text or symbols visible)

ABSA Indicator Light

WARNING!

☐ The accident risk persists despite the application of torque to the steering wheel by the ABSA system.
□ Applying a torque that corrects the steering wheel alignment does not always prevent an accident. It is always the driver's responsibility to steer, brake or accelerate, especially after the ABSA system warning or after the steering wheel torque intervention. The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objects along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries. The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ In some cases, the system could apply an improper torque to the steering wheel. This application can be interrupted at anytime turning the steering wheel in the opposite direction.

Sensors

The system uses two radar sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper (one for each side) to detect the presence of vehicles (cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) in the rear side blind spots of the car.

The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than about 6 mph (10 km/h), or when REVERSE (R) is engaged.

The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the car is stationary and in PARK (P).

The detection area of the system covers about a lane on both sides of the car around 10 ft (3 meters).

This area begins from the door mirror and extends for about 20 ft (6 meters) towards the rear part of the car.

When the sensors are active the system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the car and warns the driver about the possible presence of cars in these areas.

Front view of a car's rear bumper with arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

Rear Sensor Location

While driving, the system monitors the detection zone in three different situations:

□ When you are being overtaken by a vehicle;
□ When you are overtaking a vehicle;
□ When a vehicle approaches from the side;

to check if it is necessary to intervene in order to keep the vehicle inside the lane on both sides.

NOTE:

The system does not signal the presence of fixed objects (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of these objects. This is normal and does not indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not warn the driver about the presence of cars coming from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes.

Activation/Deactivation

The system can be activated/deactivated using the "Driver Assistance" menu in the radio system. Select signal type, strength levels and sensitivity.

NOTE:

Vehicles with an active system will display the following screen, on the radio system.

Music Jack's Phone Spectre Tycho Asakira Climate Air Distribution 0 Driver Assistance Safety 721 721

System Intervention

The system intervenes in the following conditions:

□ the direction indicators have been turned on;
☐ there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane on the same side of the direction indicator (blind spot area);
□ lane lines are not correctly detected;
□ the driver tries to change lane intentionally.

If the system detects the presence of a vehicle in the rear side blind spots of the car, it applies a torque on the steering wheel (if it has been set through the "Settings" menu of the radio system), in order to warn the driver of the need to keep the car inside the lane and thus avoid collisions with other vehicles.

The application of torque and vibration is however only available with car speed between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).

The application of torque, as well as of the vibration, is suppressed/inhibited if:

☐ The torque given by the driver of the steering wheel is high
□ Lateral acceleration is high
☐ The trailer is not connected to the correct control module
☐ At least one hand is not detected on the steering wheel for longer than a specific time
☐ The turn signal is turned off

NOTE:

The steering wheel torque is not applied if the system is unable to detect a lane and if the direction indicator for the appropriate side has not been switched on.

The steering wheel detects the presence of the driver's hands by a capacitive sensor installed in the steering wheel and by the applied torque measured on the steering column.

System Availability

Aggressive driving of the car, or driving on the median lines, will prevent the correct operation of the system.

In case of intervention of the stability and braking systems (FCW, ESC, ABS) they will prevent the system from operating.

Lane change will disable the system for a certain period of time.

The road must also comply with some specific characteristics, such as:

☐ Maximum/minimum lane width.

□ Clearly identified and defined double yellow lines and, for a limited period of time, a lane with a single demarcation line.

NOTE:

In some cases, for a limited period of time, the system may be activated by a lane with a single median line.

In cases of good road surface conditions, the system could correctly recognize other types of valid lane markings (e.g. road edges, sidewalks, etc.).

Hands Presence On The Steering Wheel Detection

The system is able to detect the presence of the driver's hands on the steering wheel.

When the system does not detect the presence of hands on the steering wheel for zero to six seconds, the following screen will be displayed on the instrument cluster display. No acoustic warning will be emitted in this case.

P 12:36 PM 26 °F 7 75936 mi 583 mi

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (Up To Six Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence of hands on the steering wheel from 6 to 15 seconds, the following screen will be displayed on the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic signal will sound if hands are not detected on the steering wheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A continuous signal will sound if hands are not detected on the steering wheel for 12 to 15 seconds.

P 12:36 PM 26°F 75936 mi 583 mi

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removed from the steering wheel, the LKA system will be deactivated and a dedicated message will be shown on the instrument cluster display. A short acoustic signal will sound in this case.

In any of the situations above where the hands are removed from the steering wheel for more than six seconds, it is necessary to reposition the hands on the steering wheel.

Changing The System Sensitivity

The system's sensitivity can be set through the radio system in the "Driver Assistance" menu and then selecting "Comfort". Sensitivity "High" or "Low" can be selected.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System

The Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) system assists the driver during reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced visibility.

When the ABSA system is active, the RCP system monitors the rear detection areas on both sides of the vehicle to detect objects moving towards the sides of the vehicle at a minimum speed between 0.6 mph and 2 mph (1 km/h and 3 km/h) to objects moving at a maximum speed of 22 mph (35 km/h).

These are generally occurrences that happen in parking areas.

The system activation is signaled to the driver by means of a visual and audible warning.

NOTE:

If the sensors are covered by objects or vehicles, the system may not work as intended.

Changing the system sensitivity

To change the sensitivity and the strength of the torque intervention on the steering wheel, refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement.

Driver Attention Assist (DAA) System — If Equipped

The Driver Attention Assist (DAA) system detects when the driver is feeling fatigued and warns the driver to pull over and take a break.

To Activate/Deactivate

The DAA system can be activated and deactivated through the radio system by selecting the following in order:

1. "Driver Assistance"
2. "Driver Attention Assist"

WARNING!

The DAA System is an aid for driving and does not relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue while driving, pull over safely for a break without waiting for the DAA to intervene. Only return to the road when you are in the right physical and mental condition to prevent endangering yourself and other drivers.

System Intervention

Using information from the front camera, the system implements two operating logics:

☐ The first operating logic takes the driving style into account, observing the road and detecting to what extent the driver can continue driving with few lane crossing events.

☐ The second operating logic measures the time spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph (180 km/h). If the “Standard” option is selected, in these conditions, the “Dozy Driver” message may appear after three hours of driving. If the “Early” option is selected and these conditions occur, the “Dozy Driver” message will be displayed after two hours of driving.

NOTE:

If the conditions described above are not detected continuously during the entire driving period, the "Dozy Driver" message may be displayed later than two or three hours. If the driving style indicates that the driver is unable to follow the road trajectory and respect the horizontal lane markings, the red symbol will appear on the instrument cluster display to suggest that the driver should stop for a break. An audible signal will also sound.

If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the system by pushing the MENU button on the multifunction lever, the message will disappear from the display and the symbol will be displayed in the dedicated area of the instrument cluster display until the next engine shutdown.

If the driver ignores the warning provided by the system and does not stop, the message will continue to remain on the display, along with the symbol.

NOTE:

☐ In the event of a DAA system failure, an amber symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display along with a dedicated message.
☐ If the ABS activates, "ABS ACTIVE" will display in place of the DAA symbol and will remain active until the ABS deactivates.

ID R NW 12:36 PM 72.5 °F Take a break! Press MENU button to dismiss 16 mi 360 mi +!

DAA Warning Message

ED R NW 12:36 PM 72.5 °F MPH 16 mi 360 mi

DAA Warning Icon

Changing The System Sensitivity

The system intervention sensitivity can be adjusted through the radio system by selecting the following in order:

1. "Driver Assistance"
2. "Safety"

NOTE:

☐ If "Race" mode (if equipped) is activated the DAA system will be automatically deactivated.
☐ The system sensitivity cannot be changed in the event of a camera system failure.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System

This is a driving assistance system composed of a radar located behind the front fascia/bumper and a camera located in the center of the windshield.

Close-up of a white car's front grille and headlights (no text or symbols visible)

Front Fascia/Bumper Radar Location

3D cutaway view of a vehicle interior showing internal compartments and structural elements (no text or symbols)

Windshield Camera Location

In the event of an imminent collision, the system intervenes by automatically applying the vehicle's brakes to prevent a the collision or reduce its effects.

The system provides the driver with audible and visual signals through specific messages on the instrument cluster display.

D3 12:36 PM 26.5°F 7 75936 mi 583 mi →

D3 12:36 PM 26.5°F 7 7 d BRAKE! 75936 mi 583 mi

The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a potential front end collision is detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the driver time to intervene.

In situations with the risk of collision, if the system detects no intervention by the driver, it provides automatic braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential front end collision (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on the brake pedal is detected, but not deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system by reducing vehicle speed further (additional assistance in braking stage).

The system will intervene automatically in case of imminent collision or impact against a pedestrian crossing the road (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).

NOTE:

For safety reasons, when the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers may remain blocked for about two seconds. Make sure to press the brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly forward.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Engagement/Disengagement

The system may be disengaged (and engaged again) in the “Driver Assistance” menu of the Information and Entertainment system.

The system can be deactivated even with the ignition device in the ON position.

NOTE:

The system status can be changed with car at a standstill only.

Select from among three operating modes:

□ Warning And Braking: the system (if active), in addition to the visual and audible warnings, provides limited braking, automatic braking, and additional assistance in braking stage where the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of a potential front-end collision.
☐ Only Warning: the system (if active), does not provide limited braking, but guarantees automatic braking or additional assistance

in braking stage where the driver does not brake at all or not sufficiently enough in the event of a potential front-end collision.

□ Disabled: the system does not provide visual and audible warnings, limited braking, automatic braking, or additional assistance in braking stage. The system will therefore provide no indication of a possible collision.

Activation/Deactivation

The Forward Collision Warning system is activated whenever the engine is started regardless of what is shown on the radio system.

Following a deactivation, the system will not warn the driver about the possible collision with the preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting selected with the radio system.

NOTE:

Each time the engine is started, the system is activated regardless of what setting was selected when the engine was turned off.

The system is active:

□ Each time the engine is started
□ In the radio system
□ When the ignition is in the ON position
☐ When the vehicle speed is between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
□ When the front seat belts are fastened

NOTE:

If the safety belts of the front seats are not correctly fastened, the system will not intervene on the braking system (only audible and visual signals will be provided).

Changing The System Sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can be changed through the radio system menu, choosing from one of the following three options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far". Refer to the description in the Information and Entertainment System Owner's Manual Supplement for how to change the settings.

The default setting is "Medium". With this setting, the system warns the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two settings.

With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the system will warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a greater distance, thus providing the possibility of acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually. This setting provides the driver with the maximum possible reaction time to prevent a potential collision.

With the option set to "Near", the system will alert the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is close. This setting offers the driver a lower reaction time compared to the "Medium" and "Far" settings, in the event of a potential collision, but permits more dynamic driving of the vehicle. The system sensitivity setting is kept in the memory when the engine is turned off.

System Limited Operation Warning

If a dedicated message is displayed, a condition limiting the system operation may have occurred. The possible reasons of this limitation are if something is blocking the camera view, or a fault is present.

If an obstruction is signaled, clean the area of the windshield.

Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may be not completely available.

When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and a dedicated message is shown on the display, it means that there is a fault with the system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle, but you are advised to contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Radar Indication Not Available

If conditions are such that the radar cannot detect obstacles correctly, the system is deactivated and a dedicated message appears on the display. This generally occurs in the event of poor visibility, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily. The function of this system can also be temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the fascia/bumper. In such cases, a dedicated message will be shown on the display and the system will be deactivated. This message can sometimes appear in conditions of high reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions limiting the system functions end, it will go back to normal and complete operation.

In certain cases, this dedicated message could be displayed when the radar is not detecting any vehicles or objects within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the reason behind this message, check if the sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to clean or remove any obstructions in the area.

If the message appears frequently, even in the absence of atmospheric conditions such as snow, rain, mud or other obstructions, contact an authorized dealer for a sensor alignment check.

In the absence of visible obstructions, manually removing the decorative cover trim and cleaning the radar surface could be required. Have this operation performed at an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not install devices, accessories, or aerodynamic attachments in front of the sensor or darken it in any way, as this can compromise the correct functioning of the system.

Frontal Collision Alarm With Active Braking

If this function is selected, the brakes are operated to reduce the speed of the vehicle in the event of potential collision.

This function applies an additional braking pressure if the braking pressure applied by the driver does not suffice to prevent potential collision.

The function is active with speed above 2 mph (4 km/h).

NOTE:

When using an automatic car wash it is recommended to deactivate the system through the settings of the radio system. The system may detect the presence of a car, a wall or another obstacle and activate.

Driving In Special Conditions

In certain driving conditions, system intervention might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore be very careful, keeping control of the vehicle.

□ Driving close to a bend.
☐ The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.
□ Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane.

□ Lane change by other vehicles.
□ Vehicles traveling at right angles to the vehicle.
☐ In particularly complex traffic conditions, the driver can deactivate the system manually through the radio system.
☐ If the driver depresses the brake pedal fully or makes an excessive steering maneuver during system operation, the automatic braking function may deactivate (e.g. to allow a possible maneuver to avoid the obstacle).
☐ The FCW system is automatically deactivated when operating in race mode and a warning message will be displayed on the instrument cluster ➞ page 273.

NOTE:

Driving Close To A Bend

When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system may detect a vehicle in front you, but not in the same driving lane. In cases such as these, the system may intervene.

Top-down diagram of a car on a curved road with a vehicle approaching (no text or symbols)

Driving Around Wide Curves

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout On a roundabout, the system could intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead which is leaving the roundabout.

Top-down view of a road intersection with two cars and a vehicle, no visible text or symbols

Driving In Roundabouts

Vehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane

The system cannot detect vehicles in front of you but outside the range of the radar sensor and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Top-down view of a car with a person projecting a light beam through it, on a road with dashed lane lines (no text or symbols)

Driving Near Small Vehicles

Lane Change By Other Vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the same lane as your vehicle within the operating range of the radar sensor, may cause the system to intervene.

Top-down diagram of three cars on a road with a light beam directed toward each, showing an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

Row of gray icons representing various activities including car, email, vehicle, and security symbols

Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To The Vehicle

The system may temporarily react to a vehicle that is passing through the radar sensor's operating range at right angles.

Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a traffic cone, no text or symbols present

Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range

WARNING!

☐ The system has not been designed to prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in advance. Failure to take into account this warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system may intervene inside multi-story parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of the real driving scenario coverage by the system and must not be regarded as faults.

☐ The system has been designed for road use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, the system must be deactivated to avoid unnecessary warnings. Automatic deactivation is signaled by the dedicated warning light/symbol switching on in the instrument panel → page 73.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that sends the inflation pressure information of each tire to the control unit, and will signal the driver in the event of insufficient tire pressure.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

Tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. See page 234 for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires.

The TPMS will signal the driver if pressure falls below the warning limit for any reason, including the effects of low temperature and normal loss of pressure from the tire.

The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation level. Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure is indicated by the (1) warning light displaying in the instrument cluster, increase the inflation pressure up to the prescribed cold inflation value.

The system will automatically update, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

NOTE:

The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tire pressure drops (e.g. if a tire bursts). In this case, proceed with caution and avoid abrupt steering.

Operating Example

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

☐ The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to assure proper TPMS feature operation.
☐ Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
□ After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication

If an insufficient pressure value is detected on one or more tires, the (1) Warning Light in the instrument cluster will display alongside the dedicated messages, the system will highlight the tire or tires with insufficient pressure graphically, and an acoustic signal will be emitted.

In this case, stop the vehicle, check the inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate the necessary tire or tires to the correct cold inflation pressure value, shown on the display or in the dedicated TPMS menu.

TPMS Temporarily Disabled:

TPMS Check Message

When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provided that the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

□ Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
☐ Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
☐ Packed snow or ice around the wheels of wheel housings.
□ Using tire chains on the vehicle.
□ Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

After the punctured tire has been repaired with the original tire sealant contained in the Tire Kit, the previous condition must be restored so that the ⬆Warning Light is off during normal driving.

TPMS Deactivation

The TPMS can be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message in the instrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument

cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, as long as no system fault exists.

NOTE:

☐ The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
☐ The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
□ Driving on a significantly underinflated tire will cause the tire to overheat, and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
☐ The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
☐ Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire ➔ page 273.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

□ Seat Belt Systems
□ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Ai Bags
□ Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position ↘ page 174.

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint ➔ page 174.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, see ➤ page 270 for customer service contact information.

WARNING!

□ Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
☐ Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

☐ Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
☐ In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
☐ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
☐ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.
☐ Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
☐ Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
☐ A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
☐ A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
☐ A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

☐ A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

☐ A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Close-up of a hand holding a red tool near a metallic bracket (no visible text or symbols)

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt Buckle

1. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the

latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

1. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions

Technical diagram showing labeled components of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts and a magnified inset view.

Second Row Seat Belts

1 – Seat Belt Buckle
2 – Seat Belt Latch Plate
3 - Mini Latch Plate
4 — Mini Seat Belt Buckle
5 — Mini Buckle Release

The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the parcel tray for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

1. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
2. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
3. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

Close-up of hands holding a red object with an arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols

Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

WARNING!

☐ If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
□ When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

0226075266

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information on ALR, see ➞ page 183. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

ALR ALR dL ALR dL ALR dL

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

□ Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
□ Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

☐ The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
☐ Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
☐ Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

□ Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
□ Air Bag Warning Light
□ Steering Wheel and Column
□ Instrument Panel
□ Knee Impact Bolsters
□ Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
□ Seat Belt Buckle Switch
□ Supplemental Side Air Bags
□ Supplemental Knee Air Bags

□ Front and Side Impact Sensors

□ Seat Belt Pretensioners

□ Seat Track Position Sensors

Air Bag Warning Light

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be mainte-

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and utility services, including car, phone, gear, and tools

nance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

☐ The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
☐ The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
☐ The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, see ➤ page 73.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Driver Air Bag

Close-up of a car's front wheel and side panel, showing red and white design (no text or symbols visible)

Passenger Air Bag

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components, showing dashboard, steering wheel, and dashboard controls.

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations

1 – Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags

WARNING!

□ Being too close to the steering wheel instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
□ Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-stage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

WARNING!

☐ No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
☐ Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
☐ Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

☐ Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
☐ Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.

AIRBAG

Driver Knee Air Bag

AIRBAG

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

3D rendered illustration of a car seat with a red highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

Side view of a silver sedan car with red trim and side mirror (no visible text or symbols)

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

☐ Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

□ Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
☐ Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

☐ Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
□ Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
☐ Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

☐ Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
□ Air Bag Warning Light
□ Steering Wheel and Column
□ Instrument Panel
□ Knee Impact Bolsters
☐ Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

□ Seat Belt Buckle Switch
□ Supplemental Side Air Bags
□ Supplemental Knee Air Bags
□ Front and Side Impact Sensors
□ Seat Belt Pretensioners
□ Seat Track Position Sensors

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

☐ The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

☐ As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as transportation, weather, security, and inspection

NOTE:

☐ Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
□ After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

☐ Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
☐ Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
□ Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power

☐ Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System

□ Unlock the power door locks

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

☐ Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door

□ Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine
  • Electric Motor (if equipped)
  • Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
  • Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
  • Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition ACC or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer ActionNOTE:Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds	Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ACC/ON/RUN.	Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.	Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.	Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.	Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.	Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.	Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.	Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.	Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).	Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition OFF.
12. Turn ignition ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).	System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data|Recorder (EDR)

WARNING!

□ Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
☐ It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
☐ Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

☐ How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
☐ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
☐ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
□ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

☐ For additional information, refer http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1-888-327-4236
□ Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

	Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers	Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint	Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children	Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint	Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children	Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt	Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

□ Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

□ Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
□ After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
□ When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat - while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type	Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint	Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
		LATCH – Lower Anchors Only	Seat Belt Only	LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor	Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor
Rear-FacingChild Restraint	Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-FacingChild Restraint	More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg)		X
Forward-FacingChild Restraint	Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-FacingChild Restraint	More than 65 lbs(29.5 kg)				X

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

Anchor. Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

022668173

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Top-down view of a car with four windows and three side panels, no visible text or symbols

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorage Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Row of grayscale icons representing transportation and safety symbols, including car, sun, helmet, vehicle, and magnifying glass.

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg)	Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No	Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner's manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?	No	Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No	Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes	The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes		The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint ➔ page 35.

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. Each anchorage is under a

cover with the anchorage symbol on it. Lift the cover to access the lower anchorage.

Diagram showing a numbered mechanical component with labeled parts 1 and 2, highlighting a specific feature.

LATCH Anchorage Locations

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar
2 - LATCH Anchorage Locations

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.

They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a red clip inserted, showing internal structure and no visible text or symbols.

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

WARNING!

☐ Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
□ Never use the same lower anchorage attach more than one child restraint. See ➤ page 182 for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See ➤ page 183 to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See page 186 for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

☐ Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
☐ Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

☐ Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
□ Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

See the "Automatic Locking Mode" description ➤ page 164 for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

ALR ALR dL ALR dL ALR dL

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Row of grayscale icons representing various activities including car, phone, email, steering wheel, driver, traffic safety, vehicle, gear, search, and a red icon with people.

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint	Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes	Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes		The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint ➔ page 35.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	No	Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

☐ Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
□ Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See ➤ page 186 for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
   Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See ➤ page 182 for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

Three-step illustration of a car seat with diagonal lines indicating seat alignment, no text or symbols present.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.

Diagram of a vehicle interior with numbered annotations pointing to specific components

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

1 – Tether Strap Hook
2 - Cover
3 — Tether Anchor

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
2. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
3. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

☐ An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
☐ If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat-backs as you remove slack in the strap.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

☐ Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
☐ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
☐ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
□ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in seat and using a seat belt properly.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately page 159.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

☐ ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
☐ ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
☐ ONLY use the driver's side floor mat on the driver's side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
□ ONLY use the passenger's side floor mat on the passenger's side floor area.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver's side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.
☐ NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
☐ If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
☐ It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

☐ Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
☐ If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
☐ If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

☐ Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
☐ Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these may interfere with your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can help you to deal with critical situations independently.

In an emergency, we recommend that you call the phone number found in the Warranty Book.

You may also consider contacting an authorized dealer.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in the switch bank below the radio screen.

Push the switch once to turn the Hazard Warning Flashers on. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn the Hazard Warning Flashers off.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is cycled to OFF.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air conditioners and a red warning sign (no readable text or symbols)

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

CAUTION!

Prolonged use of the Hazard Warning Flashers may discharge the vehicle's battery.

SOS - EMERGENCY CALL

Your vehicle has an on-board assistance feature that is designed to provide support in case of an accident and/or emergency. This feature is automatically activated by air bag intervention, or can be activated manually by pushing the button located on the base of the rear view mirror.

NOTE:

SOS - Emergency Call will only work with an enabled network operator.

SOS M0703000016US

SOS - Emergency Call Button

The SOS - Emergency Call system automatically forwards a call to emergency services in the event of an accident with air bag intervention providing that the ignition device is in RUN position and the air bags are working. When the connection between the vehicle and a public safety operator is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit location and vehicle information to the emergency service operator.

Only a public safety operator can remotely end the SOS - Emergency Call and, if necessary, call the vehicle back through the Emergency Call system. Once the call has ended, you can still call the emergency service operator to indicate additional information by pushing the button again.

To Use SOS - Emergency Call

Push and hold the SOS - Emergency Call button for a few seconds. The LED, located next to the SOS button, will blink once and then stay on indicating a call has been placed.

NOTE:

If the SOS - Emergency Call button is accidentally pushed, there is a 10 second delay before the call is placed. The system will issue a verbal alert that a call is about to be made. To cancel the call connection, push the SOS - Emergency Call button again.

Once a connection between the vehicle and an emergency service operator is made, the SOS - Emergency Call system will transmit the following important vehicle information to the operator:

☐ Indication that the occupant placed an SOS - Emergency Call.
☐ The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
☐ The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

You will then be able to speak with the emergency service operator to determine if additional help is needed.

The SOS - Emergency Call has priority over other audio sources, which will be muted. If you have a phone connected via Bluetooth, it is disconnected and reconnected at the end of the SOS - Emergency Call. Voice prompts will guide you during the SOS - Emergency Call. If a connection is made between an emergency service operator and your vehicle, emergency service operators may record conversations and sounds within your vehicle once a connection is made, and by using the service you consent to having this information shared.

NOTE:

If you have not subscribed to the SOS service or if the service is not available or has expired, the Connect system will display a dedicated screen when the button is pressed informing you to contact the national emergency number 9-1-1 (the respective graphic button will be displayed to make the call if you have connected your mobile phone via Bluetooth® The call to the national emergency number 9-1-1 will be made via the mobile phone by pressing red graphic button shown on the Connect system display.

Row of grayscale icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

Emergency Call SOS Call Not Successful Emergency Call Temporarily Unavailable or Feature Not Active Call 9-1-1 for Emergency 9-1-1

M0703000019US
SOS Screen Message

SOS - Emergency Call System Limitations

When the ignition switches to the RUN position, the Emergency Call system runs a routine check. During this check, a red indicator will illuminate for about three seconds. This signal must not be confused with a fault warning. In the event of a malfunction, the red indicator would remain on. If the SOS - Emergency Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected:

NOTE:

The SOS Call function may not be available for the first minute after the vehicle is started

☐ The LED next to the SOS button will be continuously illuminated red.
☐ The Emergency Call system is powered by its own non-rechargeable battery to ensure operation, even when the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. When system battery is discharged, the instrument cluster display will show a special message, different than other messages referring to other types of faults. In this case, the system works only if powered by the vehicle's battery.
☐ The instrument cluster will display a message alerting you to contact the Service Network along with a failure warning light.

Even if the SOS - Emergency Call system is fully functional, external or uncontrolled factors may prevent or stop SOS - Emergency Call operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

☐ The key fob has been removed from the vehicle, and the delayed accessories mode is active.
☐ The ignition is in OFF position.
□ The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
☐ The SOS - Emergency Call system software and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle collision.
☐ There are network problems that could limit or impair service operation (e.g., error by operator, busy network, bad weather, etc.).

If the vehicle battery connection fails due to a collision or accident, the system can support an SOS - Emergency Call for a limited period of time. If the battery is disconnected for service, the system turns off. In this case, it will be possible to make an SOS - Emergency Call only when the battery is reconnected to the vehicle's electrical system.

System Requirements

□ Vehicle must have an operable 3G network connection.
□ Vehicle must be powered with a properly functioning electrical system.
☐ The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC position.

WARNING!

□ Never place anything on or near the vehicle's 3G and GPS aerials. You could prevent 3G and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 3G network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS-Emergency Call system to function properly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS-Emergency Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE AND SYSTEM LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT) THE SOS FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT OPERATE.

☐ The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the air bag warning light in the instrument cluster if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is detected. If the air bag warning light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the SOS-Emergency Call system may not be able to send a signal to an emergency service operator. If the air bag warning light is illuminated, contact the Service Network to have the air bag system checked immediately.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Ignoring the LED on the SOS-Emergency Call button could mean you will not have emergency call services if needed. If the LED on SOS-Emergency Call button is illuminated red, contact the Service Network to have the emergency call system checked immediately.
☐ If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an emergency service operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
☐ Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.

Frequently Asked Questions:

What happens if I accidentally push the SOS - Emergency Call Button? You have 10 seconds after pushing the emergency button to cancel the call. To cancel the call, push the button again.

What type of information is sent when I make an SOS - Emergency Call from my vehicle? Certain vehicle information, such as the VIN, is transmitted along with last known GPS location. Also note that emergency service operators may record conversations and sounds within your vehicle once a connection is made, and by using the service you consent to having this information shared.

When can I use the SOS - Emergency Call button? You can ONLY Use the SOS - Emergency Call button to make a call if you or someone else needs emergency assistance.

Row of grayscale icons representing various activities including car, email, steering wheel, and safety warning symbol

TIRE SERVICE KIT

Description

If a tire is punctured, you can make an emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the trunk beneath the load floor.

Interior view of a computer drive bay showing internal components and casing (no text or symbols visible)

Tire Service Kit Location

The Tire Service Kit includes:

☐ Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid.
□ Filler tube.
□ Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph (80 km/h)", to be attached in a position easily visible to the driver (e.g. on the dashboard) after repairing the tire.
☐ Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge and connectors.

☐ An instruction pamphlet for reference in prompt and correct use of the Tire Service Kit, which must be then given to the personnel dealing with the sealant-treated tire.
□ A pair of protective gloves.
□ Adaptors for inflating different elements.

Diagram of a portable air purifier with labeled components including ports, cables, and sensors

Tire Service Kit Components

1 – Sealant Cartridge
2 - Filler Tube
3 - Adhesive Label
4 – Air Compressor

NOTE:

The sealant is effective with external temperatures of between -40^ F ( -40^ C) and 122^ F ( 50^ C). The sealant has an expiration date.

To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair the tire safely. You should be as far as possible from the side of the road, and in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic. Activate the Hazard Warning Flashers, remove the safety triangle from the trunk, and place it at a suitable distance from the vehicle to make other drivers aware of your presence.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the tire service kit hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the tire repair kit flat on the ground.
3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).
4. Apply the Electric Park Brake and cycle the engine OFF.

Inflation Procedure

WARNING!

☐ Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
☐ Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:

• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

□ Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat sources.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
☐ Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
☐ Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid in the proper compressor holder, pushing down hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the filler tube and tighten the fitting on the tire valve.

Diagram showing a pressure sensor setup with labeled components and a close-up of the wheel rim.

Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire

1 - Sealant Cartridge
2-Filler Tube

Row of grayscale icons representing various transportation and safety symbols, including cars, maps, vehicles, and charts.

1. Make sure the power switch of the compressor is in the O (off) position.
2. Insert the plug into the power outlet in the center console, then start the engine.

Interior view of a refrigerator with a red plastic bag and an attached electric shaver (no text or symbols visible)

Center Console Power Outlet

1. Start the compressor by placing the power switch in the I (on) position.
2. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire placard, located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door ↩ page 237. In order to obtain a more precise reading, check the pressure value on pressure gauge with the compressor off.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and an inset view of the component, marked with numbers 5 and 6.

Air Compressor

5 - Power Switch
6 - Pressure Gauge

1. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the compressor from the valve and power outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards approximately five tire turns in order to distribute the sealant inside the tire evenly, and then repeat the inflation operation.

2. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes of turning the compressor on, do not drive the vehicle, and contact an authorized dealer.

3. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km), stop, apply the electric park brake, and recheck the tire pressure.

4. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see an authorized dealer.
5. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct pressure (with engine running and electric park brake applied), and drive immediately with great care to an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.

1. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant bottle where it can be easily seen by the driver as a reminder that the tire has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, as well as not to exceed the speed restriction for the treated tire.

WARNING!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed.

Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure

The compressor can also be used to check and, if necessary, restore the tire pressure. Proceed as follows:

1. Release the quick connector and connect it directly to the valve of the tire to be inflated.
2. Push the air release button.

Diagram illustrating car tire assembly steps with labeled parts and directional arrows

Air Compressor Components

7 — Air Release Button
8 – Quick Connector
9 - Release Button

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

NOTE:

Only use original cartridges, which can be purchased at an authorized dealer.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushing the release button located on the side of the compressor.
2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by pushing downward firmly.

1 9

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

1 - Sealant Cartridge
9 - Release Button

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

Remote Battery Connection Posts

The remote posts of the battery for jump starting can be found inside the engine compartment. The battery itself is located in the luggage compartment.

The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing engine and dashboard components with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Remote Negative Post Location

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

The positive post (+) can be accessed by removing the cover, and opening the protective flap.

Close-up of a red plastic component with a circular mark and cross symbol, mounted on a gray mechanical bracket (no text or symbols visible)

Protective Cover

Mechanical component with red highlighted section and black arrow indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

Protective Flap

Close-up of a red 3D-printed object inside a gray container (no visible text or symbols)

Remote Positive Post

To carry out the operation, you need to have the correct cables to connect to the battery of another vehicle or a portable battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative).

Jump Starting

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting:

See below steps to prepare for jump starting:

1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off all electrical features in the vehicle.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the park brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Cable Connection

See below steps to perform the jump starting procedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster pack, before starting the vehicle, wait a few seconds after completing the connection.

Row of grayscale icons representing various activities including car, sun, helmet, car, and search tools

Cable Disconnection

Once the engine is started, remove the connection cables in reverse sequence, as described below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or coasting downhill.

NOTE:

You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing it.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

Engine overheating may occur in situations of extreme environmental temperatures, frequent engine stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If the engine becomes overheated, the Engine Temperature Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate along with a dedicated message → page 73. If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by an authorized dealer.

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

□ On the highways — slow down.
☐ In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

☐ If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

☐ You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads "H", pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment

Do not go near the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine. Wait until the steam dissipates. Then, open the hood and start the engine.

If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Escaping

Open the hood and idle the engine until it cools.

NOTE:

☐ If the cooling fan does not operate while the engine is running, the engine temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized dealer.
☐ If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged unless repairs are made. Contact an authorized dealer.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

See an authorized dealer to disengage the manual park release lever.

WARNING!

A special tool is required to perform this procedure. Damage to the vehicle or serious injury or death may occur if the procedure is performed improperly. Please contact an authorized dealer to have this procedure performed.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

CAUTION!

☐ The vehicle should be transported with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted. When towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission.
☐ Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
□ When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
☐ Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remain released, while being towed.
□ Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The operators of the assistance vehicle must be informed with regard to the vehicle's minimum height from ground in order to avoid contact between the ends of the fascia/bumper with the equipment of the breakdown truck.

The following image illustrates the front and rear attachment corners of the vehicle, to be taken into consideration when loading the vehicle on the assistance vehicle.

A B

Front And Rear Loading Angles

	RWDModels	AWDModels
A – Front Loading Angle	12.880°	15.160°
B – Rear Loading Angle	17.105°	18.400°

Row of grayscale icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as car, phone, sun, and safety warning symbol

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.

CAUTION!

☐ Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
□ When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
☐ Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels lifted from the ground using a trailer or special equipment allowing lifting of the rear wheels.

All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.

CAUTION!

☐ DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
☐ DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

TOW EYES

If the vehicle has been in an accident or has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools container located inside the luggage compartment for vehicle towing. There are two locations on the front fascia/bumper available for Tow Eye installation, and one in the rear on the passenger side. Towing is meant only for short distances on a paved road surface.

Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front (left or right side) or rear fascia/bumper, pushing on the upper part.

Front view of a white car's head and grille with red dots marking specific points (no text or symbols visible)

Front Tow Eye Cap Locations

Front view of a white car with visible headlights and side stripes (no text or symbols)

Rear Tow Eye Cap Location

1. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the trunk and carefully clean the threaded housing on the vehicle before using it.
2. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about 11 turns).

NOTE:

The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the tow hook must not exceed 15^ .

MAX 15°

Work Angle Of Tow Cable

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.

☐ Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
☐ Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

☐ The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location.
☐ Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles.
☐ In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed.
☐ When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

This feature is a communication network that takes effect in the event of an impact ➕ page 172.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder. The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle ↗ page 174.

Correct servicing permits the performance of the vehicle to be maintained over time, as well as limited running costs and safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle under the best conditions.

For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned a series of checks and services for your vehicle at fixed intervals based on distance and time, as described in the Scheduled Servicing Plan.

Before each service, it is always necessary to carefully follow the instructions in the Scheduled Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically check level of fluids, tire pressure, etc.).

Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized dealer according to a set time schedule. If, during each operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be carried out with the owner's explicit consent only.

NOTE:

Scheduled Servicing intervals are required by FCA US LLC. Failure to have them carried out may invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

You are advised to inform an authorized dealer of any small operating irregularities without waiting for the next service.

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles (1,000 km) or before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:

□ Engine coolant level.
□ Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an authorized dealer as soon as possible).
□ Windshield washer fluid level.
☐ Tire inflation pressure and condition.
☐ Operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.).
☐ Operation of windshield washing/wiping system and positioning/wear of wiper blades.
□ Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Oil consumption of the engine depends on conditions and driving style. For this reason, the engine oil level must be checked every 1,860 miles (3,000 km), and top off if necessary ↗ page 213.

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of the following conditions:

□ Dusty roads.
☐ Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles (7 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.

☐ Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity.
☐ In the event of a long period of inactivity.
The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
☐ Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
□ Visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).
☐ Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte).
□ Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts.
☐ Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter.
☐ Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air filter.
☐ Check and, if necessary, replace engine air cleaner.

Severe Duty All Models

Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or predominately at idle or very low engine RPM are known as Severe Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time.

Maintenance Plan — 2.0L Engine

Thousands of miles	10	20	30	40	50	60	70	80	90	100	110	120	130	140	150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
SOS back up battery replacement (if equipped) ^1
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration date
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) and, if equipped, engine oil degradation ^2
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

Vertical sequence of gray icons representing various vehicle-related functions or services, including car, camera, steering wheel, and inspection tools.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles	10	20	30	40	50	60	70	80	90	100	110	120	130	140	150
Years	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage		• • • • • • • •
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicators	• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the accessory drive belt(s)	• • • • • • • • • • • •
Change engine coolant															•
Change engine oil and replace oil filter3
Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) •
Replace accessory drive belt(s) •
Replace engine air cleaner4			• • • • • •
Replace additional fuel filter (if equipped)	• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Change the brake fluid5
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
Replace cabin air filter4	○●○●○●○●○●○●○
Spark plug replacement6						●						●

1. The SOS back up battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.

2. If oil degradation ratio (data collectible from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

3. The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles (16,000 km).

4. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

5. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

6. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

WARNING!

☐ You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

☐ Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and service categories, including cars, vehicles, and tools.

Maintenance Plan — 2.9L Engine

Thousands of miles	10	20	30	40	50	60	70	80	90	100	110	120	130	140	150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
SOS back up battery replacement (if equipped). ^1					●●●
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration date.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.).	●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool).	●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).		●		●		●		●		●		●		●
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade.	●		●		●		●		●		●		●		●
Years	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary.	●●●●●●●●
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.		●●●●●●●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicators.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Brake pads/brake discs replacement. ^2
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the accessory drive belt(s).	●●●●●●●●●●●
Change engine coolant.															●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.	●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Replace accessory drive belt/s. ^3
Replace engine air cleaner. ^4		●●●●●●●
Replace additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and utility services, including car, truck, gear, and search functions.

Thousands of miles	10	20	30	40	50	60	70	80	90	100	110	120	130	140	150
Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10	11	12	13	14	15
Thousands of kilometers	16	32	48	64	80	96	112	128	144	160	176	192	208	224	240
Change the brake fluid.5
Replace cabin air filter.4	0 • 0 • 0 • 0 • 0 • 0 • 0 • 0
Spark plug replacement.6				• • • • • •

1. The SOS back up battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket.
3. Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every four years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every two years.
4. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
5. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.
6. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

WARNING!

☐ You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
☐ Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels — 2.0L Engine

Labeled diagram of a car engine bay showing components like fuel tank, intake manifold, and red valve parts.

1 - Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 -Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 - Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 - Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 - Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

Checking Levels — 2.9L Engine

Labeled diagram of a car engine showing six key components with red connectors and numbered parts

1 - Engine Oil Dipstick 4 - Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 - Engine Oil Filler 5 - Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover

3 - Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 - Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

Engine Oil

The engine oil level can be seen on the instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by activating on the main menu (MENU button) the following functions in sequence: "Apps"; "My Car" and "Oil Level".

Check on the display using the 6 notches that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches MAX level.

If the oil level is close to or below the MIN mark, add oil gradually through the filler, (refer to "Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On Display" in this section) considering that each notch shown on the display corresponds to approximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).

The oil level can also be checked manually on 2.9L Engine.

CAUTION!

Make sure not to add too much oil when topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess may damage the engine. Have the vehicle checked. Never exceed the MAX level when topping off engine oil. It is advisable to check the oil level in intermediate steps using the oil dipstick (2.9L Engine Only).

CAUTION!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately on the display after topping off. Consequently, wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the display and follow the procedure below.

NOTE:

Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is removed to add oil to engine. Never run the engine with cap removed as this could cause oil to leak from engine.

Manual Oil Level Checking Procedure — 2.9L Engine

Check that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Extract the dipstick again and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On Display — 2.9L Engine

If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to ensure the correct indication of the oil level on the display, proceed with the process below:

☐ Leave the car on flat ground with the engine running for approximately five minutes (temperature higher than 198^ F ( 90^ C) and shut the engine off.

☐ Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition to the ON mode without starting the engine and wait for a few seconds.

NOTE:

If the level indication is not updated after the previously described procedure, repeat the engine adjustment, shut the engine off and wait another five minutes before starting it again. If the indication is not updated after the second start, contact an authorized dealer.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On Display - 2.0L Engine

If an engine oil top-off is needed, in order to ensure the correct indication of the oil level on the display, proceed with the process below:

☐ Leave the car on flat ground with the engine running for approximately five minutes (temperature higher than 176^ F ( 80^ C) and shut the engine off.

☐ Start the engine again and idle it for about two minutes.

NOTE:

If you have added the specified amount of oil and the indicator is not reading "Full", please contact an authorized dealer.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

WARNING!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the engine to cool down before loosening the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminum cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!

CAUTION!

The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.

If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, go to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the oil in excess removed.

Do not add oil with specifications different from those of the oil already in the engine.

Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances which are harmful to the environment. To change the oil and filters, we advise you to contact an authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant

If the level is too low, remove the cap of reservoir and add the fluid described on page 267.

Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights

The windshield and headlights washer fluid reservoir has a telescopic filler.

If the level is too low, remove reservoir cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid described on page 267.

NOTE:

The headlight washing system will not work if the liquid level is low (as indicated by the symbol on the instrument cluster display). On vehicles equipped with headlight washers, there is a reference notch on the dipstick: ONLY the windshield/rear window washer operates with the level below this reference.

Brake Fluid

Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Automatic Transmission Activation System Oil

The transmission control oil level should only be checked at an authorized dealer.

Useful Advice For Extending The Life Of Your Battery

To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions:

□ When you park the car, ensure that the doors and trunk are closed properly to prevent any lights from remaining on inside the passenger's compartment.
☐ Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the engine is not running.
☐ Before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable.

If you wish to install electrical accessories after purchasing the car that require permanent electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which influence the electrical supply requirements, contact an authorized dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate the overall electrical consumption.

CAUTION!

If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery may be damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and efficiency during a vehicle start. The battery is also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as 14^ F (-10°C).

NOTE:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering must be initialized. The warning light on the instrument panel switches on to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other, and then turn it back to the central position.

Battery

The battery does not require the electrolyte to be topped up with distilled water. A periodic check carried out at an authorized dealer, however, is necessary to check efficiency.

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with another original battery with the same specifications.

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance.

WARNING!

□ Battery acid is a corrosive solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps ➞ page 199. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

☐ Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
□ Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

NOTE:

It will not be possible to open the trunk with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk opening strap on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery → page 250.

Pressure Washing

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended.

CAUTION!

Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

BATTERY RECHARGING

Important Notes

WARNING!

□ Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it may explode because of the nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.
☐ At all times while charging or recharging the battery, make sure that any sparks or open flames are kept sufficiently far away from the battery.

NOTE:

☐ Before using the charging device, always make sure that it is appropriate for the installed battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 Volts) and low amperage (maximum 15 Amps).
□ Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment.
Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the car battery.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as car, phone, gear, and tools

You can recharge the battery without disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's electrical system.

☐ To reach the battery, remove the access panel inside the trunk.

Close-up of a white mechanical component with red circular buttons and mounting holes (no text or symbols visible)

Battery Access Panel

☐ Remove the protective cover and connect the positive cable terminal of the charger (usually red) to the positive terminal (+) of the battery.
□ Connect the negative terminal of the charger (usually black) to nut next to the negative terminal (-) of the battery.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with numbered components (1 and 2), no visible text or symbols

Battery

1 - Protective Cover
2 - Negative Post (Nut)

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able to measure the charge and discharge voltage and calculate the charge level and the general condition of the battery. The sensor is placed next to the negative terminal (-) of the battery.

For a correct charge/discharge procedure, the charge voltage must go through the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on the user's manual to completely recharge the battery.
2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger off before disconnecting it from the battery.
3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of the battery charger and then the red cable terminal.
4. Refit the protective cover of the positive terminal of the battery and the access cover to the battery compartment.

NOTE:

If a "quick-type" battery charger is used with the battery fitted on the vehicle, before connecting it disconnect both cables of the battery itself. Do not use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide the starting voltage.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

The following pages contain instructions on the required maintenance from the technical personnel who designed the vehicle.

In addition to these specific maintenance instructions specified for routine scheduled servicing, there are other components which may require periodic maintenance or replacement over the vehicle's life cycle.

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Level Check

To ensure correct engine lubrication, the oil must always be kept at the appropriate level.

Check the oil level at regular intervals, for example every 1,864 miles (3,000 km).

It must be checked once full operating temperature is reached.

The vehicle must also be parked on as level a surface as possible.

The engine oil level can be checked using the Information and Entertainment system. To access the function, activate the main menu (MENU button) and select the following options in sequence: "Applications"; "My Car"; "Oil level".

Changing The Engine Oil

For the correct servicing intervals → page 204.

Choice Of Engine Oil Type

To ensure optimal performance and maximum protection in all operating conditions, it is advisable to only use certified engine oils ➕ page 267.

Additives For Engine Oil

It is strongly recommended not to use additives (other than leak detection dyes) with the engine oil.

The engine oil is a product designed specially for the vehicle and its performance may be deteriorated through the use of further additives.

Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters

For disposal of used engine oil and filters, consult the appropriate local regulations.

NOTE:

Inappropriate disposal of used engine oil may seriously harm the environment.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified filters should be used.

Engine Air Cleaner

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified filters should be used.

Air Conditioning System Maintenance

To ensure the best possible performance, the air conditioning system must be checked and undergo maintenance at an authorized dealer at the beginning of the summer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemicals to clean the air conditioning system, since the internal components may be damaged. This kind of damage is not covered by warranty.

Replace The Cabin Air Cleaner

For the correct servicing intervals → page 204. For cabin air cleaner replacement, contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by FCA US LLC for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner's information kit, for further warranty information.

Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Bodywork

Ensure that the locks and bodywork junction points, including components such as the seat guides, door hinges (and rollers), trunk and hood are periodically lubricated with lithium-based grease to ensure correct, silent operation and to protect them from rust and wear.

Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and grease. Also pay particular attention to the hood closing devices, to ensure correct operation. During operations on the hood, to be carried out with the engine cold, also remember to check, clean and lubricate the locking, release and safety devices.

Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year. Apply a small amount of high-quality lubricant directly into the lock barrel.

If necessary, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Windshield Wiper

Periodically clean the windshield and rear window and rubber profile of the windshield wiper blades, using a sponge or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive detergent. This eliminates the salt or impurities accumulated when driving.

Prolonged operation of the windshield window wipers with dry glass may cause the deterioration of the blades, in addition to abrasion of the surface of the glass. To eliminate the impurities on the dry glass, always operate the windshield washers.

In the event of very low outdoor temperatures, below 0^ F (-17.8°C), ensure that the movement of the rubber part in contact with the glass is not obstructed. Use a suitable deicing product to release it if required.

Avoid using the windshield wipers to remove frost or ice.

Also avoid contact of the rubber profile of the blades with petroleum derivatives such as engine oil, gas, etc.

WARNING!

Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather conditions.

NOTE:

The life of the windshield wiper blades varies according to the usage frequency. In any case, it is advised to replace the blades approximately once a year. When the blades are worn, noise, marks on the glass or streaks of water may be noticed. In the presence of these conditions, clean the windshield wiper blades or, if necessary, replace them.

Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades ("Service Position" Function)

The “service position” function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper blades more easily. It is also recommended to activate this function when it is snowing and to make it easier to remove any dirt deposits in the area where the blades are normally positioned, when washing.

Activation Of The Function

To activate this function, disable the wind-shield wiper before setting the ignition device to OFF.

This function can only be activated within two minutes of placing the ignition in OFF.

To activate this function, move the lever upward for at least three seconds.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with icons and a black arrow pointing to the left (no readable text or symbols)

Windshield Wiper Stalk

Function Deactivation

The function is deactivated if:

☐ More than two minutes passes before placing the ignition in the STOP position after having raised the lever and putting the wipers into service position.
☐ The ignition is placed in the ACC position and the windshield wiper control is used.

If, after using the function, the ignition is set back to ACC with the blades in a position other than rest position (at the base of the windshield), they will only return to rest position following a command given using the stalk (stalk upwards, into unstable position) or when a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.

Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades

Proceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the attachment spring and remove the blade from the arm.

Close-up of a car's side panel with red and black markings, showing a close-up of the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

Wiper Release Tab

1. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in the dedicated housing in the arm and checking that it is locked.
2. Lower the wiper arm onto the windshield.

NOTE:

Do not operate the windshield wiper with the blades lifted from the windshield.

Windshield Washer

The window washer nozzles are fixed. If there is no jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid in the reservoir.

Diagram showing two labeled components (1) on a vehicle surface with red markers and arrows indicating features.

Windshield Washers

1 - Washer Nozzles

Then, check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

Exhaust System

Adequate maintenance of the engine exhaust system represents the best protection against leaks of carbon monoxide into the passenger compartment.

If an unusual noise from the exhaust or the presence of smoke in the passenger compartment is identified, or if the underbody or rear section of the vehicle have been damaged, have the entire exhaust system and adjoining bodywork areas checked at an authorized dealer to identify any components which are broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position.

Open welding or loose connections may permit exhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment.

Have the exhaust system checked every time the vehicle is raised. Replace the components where necessary (for these operations, contact an authorized dealer).

In normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter does not require maintenance. To ensure that it operates correctly, however, and prevent it from getting damaged, it is extremely important that the engine operates perfectly.

To minimize the risk of damaging the catalytic converter, proceed as follows:

☐ Do not stop the engine or deactivate the ignition with gear engaged and vehicle in motion.
☐ Do not attempt to start the engine by bump starting.
☐ Do not persist in using the vehicle if idling is very irregular or the operating conditions are very notably irregular.

WARNING!

☐ Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you.
☐ A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

Engine Cooling System

WARNING!

☐ You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
□ Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.
□ When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

Coolant Check

Your vehicle has two cooling systems and they both need to be checked to ensure they are at proper fill levels.

Check the engine coolant and intercooler coolant level every oil change or before long trips.

If there are impurities in the engine coolant, the system must be drained, flushed and refilled: contact an authorized dealer.

Check the front part of the condenser to check for any build-up of insects, leaves or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it by spraying delicately with water.

Check the hoses of the engine/intercooler cooling system to ensure that the rubber has not deteriorated and that there are no cracks, tears, cuts or obstructions in the expansion tank side and radiator side connectors. Should there be any doubt regarding leaks from the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are required), have the seal checked at an authorized dealer.

With the engine off and at normal operating temperature, check that the cooling system radiator cap is closed properly.

WARNING!

☐ Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding of injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
☐ Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

NOTE:

Before removing the coolant reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool down.

Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The Engine/ Intercooler Coolant

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, have cleaning and flushing carried out at an authorized dealer.

For the correct servicing intervals ➤ page 204.

NOTE:

☐ For topping up, use a fluid with the same characteristics as those indicated on ➤ page 267.
☐ Do not use pure water, alcohol-based coolants, corrosions inhibitors or additional anti-rust products because they may be incompatible with the engine coolant and cause the clogging of the radiator. The use of propylene glycol-based coolant is also not recommended.

Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap

To prevent loss of engine coolant, make sure that the expansion tank cap is closed. If it is open, screw it completely until you reach/hear the click.

Periodically check the cap and clean it from any foreign bodies that may have deposited on the external surface.

WARNING!

□ Never add coolant with the engine hot or overheated.
☐ Do not attempt to cool an overheated engine by loosening or removing the cap. The heat causes a considerable increase in pressure in the cooling system.
☐ To prevent damage to the engine, only use the engine cooling circuit caps provided.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is subject to legal requirements: consult the appropriate local regulations.

NOTE:

☐ To prevent the fluid from being ingested by children or animals, do not keep it in open containers or pour it on the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor immediately. Eliminate any traces of fluid from the ground immediately.
□ When the vehicle stops after a short trip, steam may be seen coming out from front of the hood. This is a normal phenomenon which is due to the presence of rain, snow or a lot of moisture on the surface of the radiator.
☐ With engine and system cold, do not top up with coolant beyond the maximum level indicated on the reservoir in the engine compartment.

Braking System

In order to guarantee the efficiency of the braking system, periodically check its components; for this operation, contact an authorized dealer.

For the correct servicing intervals → page 204.

NOTE:

Driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may compromise its efficiency, increasing the risk of accidents. When driving, never keep your foot on the brake pedal and don't put unnecessary strain on it to prevent the brakes from overheating: excess pad wear may cause damage to the braking system.

□ When an insufficient oil level is detected contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
□ Always keep the cap of the brake fluid reservoir (in the engine compartment) completely closed.

WARNING!

☐ Use only FCA US LLC recommended brake fluid ➕ page 268. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
☐ To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
☐ Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
☐ Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

Automatic Transmission

Use only a transmission oil with the same characteristics as those indicated on ➤ page 268.

Special Additives

Do not use any type of additive with the automatic transmission oil. The automatic transmission oil is a product designed specially for this vehicle and its performance may be compromised through the use of further additives.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Frequency Of Oil Changes

In normal vehicle operating conditions, it is not necessary to change the transmission oil.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with another battery with the same specifications. It is advised to contact an authorized dealer for replacement.

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance.

NOTE:

It will not be possible to open the trunk with a key or by pressing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk opening strap on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery ↩ page 250.

FUSES

General Information

WARNING!

□ When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.
☐ If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
☐ If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.

When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/melt.

Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

Technical diagram showing three labeled components of a mechanical component, with numbered annotations pointing to each part.

Blade Fuses

1 - Electrical Circuit
2 - Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 - Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

Diagram showing three labeled components of an electrical connector, likely a fuse or socket assembly.

J-CASE Fuse

1 - Electrical Circuit
2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 – Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

Vertical sequence of icons representing various automotive-related functions such as car, battery, steering wheel, and inspection tools.

Fuse Extracting Pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to the fuse box.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a red handle and metallic parts (no visible text or symbols)

Fuse Box

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them, and extract the pliers pulling upwards.

The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to remove the different types of fuses present in the vehicle:

1

2
Fuse Extracting Pliers

1 - MINI fuse
2 - J-CASE fuse

After use, return the pliers to their proper position by following the below procedures:

□ Grab the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing.
☐ Push downward on the pliers into their housing until they click into place.

Fuse Location

The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the trunk.

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the two buttons.

Close-up of a white mechanical component with red dots and a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols present.

Release Buttons On Footboard

1 - Footboard

1. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove the panel pulling downward.

Close-up of a car interior showing a door panel with red dots and arrows indicating movement or adjustment (no text or symbols)

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 - Panel

The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit.

After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel and footboard are correctly locked.

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.
2. Remove the control unit cover.

3D rendering of a red plastic enclosure mounted on a white metal frame with mounting holes (no text or symbols visible)

Control Unit

The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit.

The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover.

After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have closed cover correctly.

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

Floor plan layout with room labels and furniture layout (no readable text or symbols)

Passenger Side Control Unit

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, and tools.

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Front power window (driver side) F33 25
Front power window (passenger side) F34 25
Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port	F36 15
Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock - if equipped), Doors unlock, Central lock F38 20
Windshield washer pump F43 20
Rear left power window F47 25
Rear right power window F48 25
Heater rear window coil F94 15

Under Hood Power Distribution Center (PDC)

To access the fuses, remove the access door that is located under the hood on the left side rear.

Close-up of a red plastic component with two black arrows pointing to a small square feature (no text or symbols visible)

Under Hood Access Cover

To remove fuse cover, remove the screws with a suitable tool.

Close-up of a red cylindrical object inside a white container, with two arrows pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Under hood Fuse Panel Cover

Under hood Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Tow Hook Module (TTM) F1 40

Hi-Fi system F8 30

KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5

I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10

KL15/a 12 Volts Power outlet (R053) F22 20

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Instructions

☐ Before replacing a bulb, check the contacts for oxidation.
☐ Replace blown bulbs with others of the same type and power.
□ After replacing a headlight bulb, always check its alignment.
☐ When a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before changing the bulb ➔ page 223.

NOTE:

In some particular climate conditions, such as low temperature, humidity, or after washing the car, a thin condensation layer may form on the internal surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will disappear after switching on the headlights.

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs
Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.
Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.
Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.
Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as car, phone, steering wheel, and car repair.

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power
Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W
Rear Fog lights H11 55 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W
Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W
Glove compartment light W5W 4 W
Trunk lid light W5W 5 W
Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

NOTE:

Only replace the bulb when the engine is off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of burns.

Direction Indicators

See below steps to replace:

1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective cover.

Close-up mechanical assembly showing internal components and a black arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)

Protective Cover Location

1. Remove protective cover.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Protective Cover

1. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off the headlight body.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor and gear components with a magnified inset highlighting a red component (no text or symbols present)

Bulb/Connector

1. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder.
2. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.
3. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is locked correctly.
4. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights

To replace the bulbs of the main beam headlights, contact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Row of grayscale icons representing various transportation and service categories, including cars, vehicles, and equipment.

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Courtesy Mirror Light

See below steps to replace:

1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the lens, using a suitable tool.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and side panel with numbered annotations (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols present.

Sun Visor

1 - Mirror Cover
2 - Lens

1. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened between the contacts.
2. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

Glove Compartment Light

See below steps to replace:

1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, using a suitable tool.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a red arrow and black arrow indicating direction (no visible text or symbols)

Courtesy Lamp Indent

1. Open protective cover up and remove the bulb pulling out of the connector.

3D diagram of a mechanical device with red component and rotating arrow (no text or symbols)

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

1. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully.
2. Close the protective cover on the lens.
3. Install courtesy light, inserting it first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights

See below steps to replace:

1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk lamp assembly using a suitable tool.

Interior view of a car showing the roof, side panels, and structural elements (no visible text or symbols)

Ceiling Light Indent

1. Open protective cover up and remove the bulb pulling out of the connector.

3D diagram of a mechanical device with red and gray components, showing rotational motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

1. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully.
2. Close the protective cover on the lens.
3. Install trunk lamp in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side, and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

Puddle Lights On Door Panel

See below steps to replace:

1. Open the door and remove the puddle light assembly, using a suitable tool.

Close-up of a car interior showing a red button and a black arrow pointing to a vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

Puddle Light Indent

1. Open protective cover up and remove the bulb pulling out of the connector.

3D diagram of a mechanical device with red component and rotating arrow (no text or symbols)

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

1. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully.
2. Close the protective cover on the lens.
3. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

Row of grayscale icons representing transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

2 3 4 MANUFACTURER TIRE NAME PITIS/ASRIS 05K TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NAME TIRE NATURES A TEMPERATURE 0601885396US

Tire Markings

1 - US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 - Size Designation
3 - Service Description
4 – Maximum Load
5 – Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

☐ P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
☐ European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R1596H.
☐ LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank..." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

EXAMPLE:

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)☐ Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code☐ "R" means radial construction, or☐ "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index☐ A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol☐ A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions☐ The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:☐ XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or☐ LL = Light load tire or☐ C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load - Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure - Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Vertical sequence of gray icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency, and maintenance.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation☐ This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)☐ 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)☐ 01 means the year 2001☐ Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar	The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure	The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	FCA US LLC recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard	A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

Close-up of a car door panel with a red indicator light and a white handle, showing no visible text or symbols.

Close-up of a vehicle door panel with a red indicator light and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY - TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OF XXX BCA. TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195/70R14 P195/70R14 T125/70D15 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 200kPa, 29PSI 200kPa, 29PSI 420kPa, 60PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 8110Galle

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard → page 136.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing page 136.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if "XXX" amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

☐ If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

☐ For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency response, and safety tools

Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant's weight = AVAILABLE Cargo/Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 5 2 3 865 lbs minus 670 lbs = 195 lbs EXAMPLE 2 3 2 1 865 lbs minus 540 lbs = 325 lbs EXAMPLE 3 2 2 0 865 lbs minus 400 lbs = 465 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 130 lbs Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 100 lbs Occupant 5: 80 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs

011a4d11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

□ Safety
□ Fuel Economy
□ Tread Wear
☐ Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Safety

WARNING!

□ Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
□ Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
☐ Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
☐ Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
□ Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
□ Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

□ Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
□ Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

☐ Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

□ Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

FCA US LLC advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures

For vehicle speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h), recommended cold tire inflation pressures are listed on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

When driving at speeds 100 mph (160 km/h) and above, increased tire pressures and reduced vehicle loading are required for high-speed vehicle operation.

For driving speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) recommended cold tire inflation pressures are listed below under "High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) luggage).

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.

2.0L Engine

Tires Wheel		Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure
		Front Rear Front Rear
225/50 R17 94W or 225/50 R17 94V *	17x7.5J 32 psi/220 kpa 35 psi/240 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa
225/45 R18 91W or 225/45 R18 91V *	18x8J 32 psi/220 kpa 36 psi/250 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa
225/40 R19 89W 19x8J 35 psi/240 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa
225/40 R19 89W ** 19x8J ** 35 psi/240 kpa - 39 psi/270 kpa -
255/35 R19 92W ** 19x9J** - 35 psi/240 kpa - 42 psi/290 kpa

(*) All Season Tires, If Equipped
(**) Matching Rims/Tires

2.9L Engine

Tires Wheel		Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure		High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure
		Front Rear Front Rear
245/35 Z R19 (93Y) XL	19x8.5J	35 psi/240 kpa	-	42 psi/290 kpa	-
265/35 R19 98V*	-	-	32 psi/220 kpa	-	42 psi/290 kpa
285/30 ZR19 (98Y) XL	19x10J	-	32 psi/220 kpa	-	42 psi/290 kpa

(*) Recommended tire size when tire chains are necessary ↩ page 248.

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

☐ The tire has not been driven on when flat.
☐ The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
☐ The puncture is no greater than a 14 of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information ↘ page 156.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 - Worn Tire

2 - New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

For further information ➤ page 245.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

□ Driving style.
☐ Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
□ Distance driven.
☐ Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

NOTE:

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed ➤ page 244. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire ➤ page 234.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

☐ Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

□ Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
☐ Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild

soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap is recommended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various transportation and safety-related categories, including cars, vehicles, gear, and tools.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Snow Traction Devices

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

NOTE:

☐ Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
□ Use on rear tires only.

☐ Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended:
☐ For a 255/35R19 tire, use of a snow traction device with a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
☐ For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or 225/40R19 tires, use of a snow traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
☐ For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a zero-clearance snow traction device recommended.

It is not possible to install traction devices on 285/30R19 tires.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

☐ Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 12 mile (0.8 km). Autosock devices do not require retightening.
☐ Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
□ Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
☐ Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
□ Observe the traction device manufacturer's instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
☐ Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. Rotation will increase tread life, maintain traction levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

To resolve this problem, tires should be rotated at each service interval (approximately every 10,000 miles [16,000km]). More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If Equipped

Due to different size tires and wheels on front and rear axles tire rotation is not possible for:

☐ 2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tires

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tires are rotated

☐ 2.9L V6 Engine Equipped with 19" tires and wheels

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19" front and rear tires are rotated

Tire rotation contributes to the preservation of the grip and traction performance on wet, muddy or snowy roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability of the vehicle.

In the case of irregular wear of the tires identify the cause and correct it as soon as possible, by contacting an authorized dealer.

Tire Rotation for Directional Tires — If Equipped

Directional tires are equipped on the following:

☐ 2.0T GME Engine equipped with same size tires and wheels on front and rear axles

The rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consideration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.

Top-down line drawing of a car with four wheels and arrows indicating forward and backward motion (no text or symbols)

Tire Rotation

All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

It is recommended to avoid situations with a large difference in wear between the front and rear tires and to strictly use Winter tires of the sizes given on the tire placard.

The AWD system and the original tires are developed together to ensure the vehicle's best performance. When changing the tires, it is recommended to us the same "AR" marked tires, to maintain the same level of performance and component life.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

STORING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than a month, the following precautions should be observed:

☐ Park the vehicle in an area that is covered and dry, and well-ventilated if possible. Slightly open the windows.
☐ Check that the Electric Park Brake is not activated.
□ Carry out the procedure: "manual trunk opening device" procedure described in this paragraph.
☐ Disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery charge. Repeat this check once every three months during storage.

☐ If the battery is not disconnected from the electrical system, check its state of charge every 30 days.
□ Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax.
□ Clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially.
□ Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift them off the glass.
☐ Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted surface by dragging any dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not use compact plastic sheets, as they do not allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the vehicle.
☐ Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) above the standard prescribed pressure and check it periodically.
☐ Do not drain the engine cooling system.

☐ Any time the vehicle is left inactive for two weeks or more, operate the air conditioning system with engine idling for at least five minutes, setting external air and with fan set to maximum speed. This operation will ensure appropriate lubrication for the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the system is operated again.

NOTE:

After placing the ignition in STOP and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition is in the STOP position and the driver side door is closed.

Manual Trunk Opening Device

Proceed as follows if the battery needs to be disconnected:

1. From the trunk interior covering, rotate the plug counterclockwise of the lock and extract the cord connected to it.

Close-up of a car's front panel with a red circular button and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Trunk Compartment

Close-up of a mechanical component with a red arrow pointing to a specific area (no visible text or symbols)

Trunk Manual Release Cord

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency response, and car maintenance.

1. Make sure the free end of the cord remains outside the trunk when closing the trunk lid.

Side view of a car's front bumper with red and black arrows pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk Closed

1. The trunk can now be opened manually by pulling the cord.
2. After releasing the trunk, rewind the strap around the plug, put it back into its housing and turn it clockwise.

CAUTION!

The Manual Trunk Opening Device allows the trunk to be opened without a key, even if the vehicle is locked. Do not use this Device unless the vehicle is parked in a secure area.

BODYWORK

Protection Against Atmospheric Agents

The vehicle is equipped with the best available technological solutions to protect the bodywork against corrosion.

These include:

□ Painting products and systems which give the vehicle resistance to corrosion and abrasion.
☐ Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steel sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.

□ Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function in the more exposed points: under door, inner wing, edges, etc.

☐ Use of "open" boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture which could favor the formation of rust inside.

□ Use of special films to protect against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).

Corrosion Warranty

Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion Warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or bodywork. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

Preserving The Bodywork

Paint

Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing the car: the frequency depends on the conditions and environment where the car is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more often in areas with high levels of atmospheric pollution or salted roads.

Some parts of the vehicle may be covered with a matte paint which, in order to be maintained intact, requires special care.

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow these instructions:

☐ If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Build up of water could cause damage to the vehicle in the long term.
☐ To make it easier to remove any dirt deposits in the area where the blades are normally located it is recommended to position the windshield wipers vertically (service position).
□ Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water if possible.
☐ Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge.
☐ Rinse well with water and dry with a leather chamois.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with special care, as water may stagnate more easily in these areas. Do not wash the car after it has been left in the sun or with the hood hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the vehicle.

If washing the car in a service that moves the car, for cars with automatic transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. You have to shut off the engine in the following conditions: car stopped, transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the starter button for at least three seconds.

NOTE:

Avoid parking under trees; the resin dropped by trees makes the paintwork go opaque and increases the possibility of corrosion.

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean cloths to prevent scratching or altering the transparency.

CAUTION!

Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth following the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device.

Front Headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for washing cars.

NOTE:

□ Never use aromatic substances (e.g. gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the headlights.
☐ When cleaning with a pressure washer, keep the pressure washer at least eight inches (20 cm) away from the headlights.

Engine Compartment

At the end of every Winter, wash the engine compartment thoroughly, taking care not to aim the jet of water directly at the electronic control units or at the windshield wiper motors. Have this operation performed at a specialized workshop. For further information page 215.

NOTE:

The washing should take place with the engine cold and the ignition device in the STOP position. After the washing operation, make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have not been removed or damaged.

INTERIORS

Periodically check the cleanliness of the interior, beneath the mats, which could cause oxidation of the sheet metal.

Seats And Fabric Parts

Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. Rub the seats with a sponge moistened with a solution of water and neutral detergent.

Cleaning heat press images on seats — if equipped:

Due to the color, opacity and wear-resistant protection with which the heat press images on some seats are made, they may be subject to temporary scratching if they are touched by finger nails, keys, or other hard objects. In such cases, the visible signs do not impair the profiled images, and can easily be removed by wiping the affected area with a microfiber cloth moistened with water (not dry) to restore the seat to its original condition. The microfiber cloth must not have been previously soaked in other substances or detergents.

Leather Seats

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or slightly damp cloth, without exerting too much pressure.

Remove any liquid or grease stains using an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth dampened with water and mild soap. If the stain persists, use specific products and observe the instructions carefully.

NOTE:

Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities.

Plastic And Coated Parts

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made from microfiber), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance and color of the components.

Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with water. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may leave residues.

Alcantara Parts — If Equipped

Alcantara parts maintenance procedure:

☐ Treat the surface with a microfiber cloth moistened with mild marseille soap and water, taking care to apply a uniform light pressure over the entire area (do not rub vigorously).
☐ Rinse and wring out the microfiber cloth, and pass it over the entire area again.
☐ Let it dry, and then brush gently with a soft brush.

CAUTION!

☐ Do not use “hard” synthetic brushes as they can damage the fabric.
☐ Do not clean small areas because it could cause “aesthetic” differences between treated and untreated areas.
☐ Do not use alcohol or acetone-based solvents.

Genuine Leather Surfaces — If Equipped

Use only water and mild soap to clean these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products.

Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.

Carbon Fiber Parts

To eliminate small scratches and marks on the carbon, contact an authorized dealer. An improperly performed operation may irreparably damage the carbon.

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or those who just want to know every detail of their vehicle, useful information on understanding how your vehicle works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with data, tables, and graphics.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The VIN is stamped on a plate on the front left corner of the dashboard cover, which can be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield.

ZARXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Windshield VIN Location

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Plate

The plates are located on the left side A-pillar and contain the data about:

□ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
□ Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).
□ Color code.
□ Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only).
□ Vehicle manufacturing date.
□ Maximum permitted weights.
☐ Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA and Canada only).

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation, security, and related activities with a red icon highlighting a gear and document.

ENGINE

2.0L Engine
Cycle Four
Number and position of cylinders 4 inline
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 90
Total displacement (cm3) 1,995
Compression ratio 10:1
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280
Maximum power (kW) 209
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 5,200
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 295
Maximum torque (Nm) 400
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 2,250 – 4,000
Fuel	87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method Minimum,91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is 0–15%
2.9L Engine
Cycle Four
Number and position of cylinders 6 / V
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82
Total displacement (cm3) 2,891
Compression ratio 9.3:1
Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 6,500
Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443
Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 2,500
Fuel	87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method Minimum,91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is 0–15%

POWER SUPPLY

	Power Supply
2.0L Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control

	Power supply
2.9L Engine	Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable intake valve actuation

TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction
2.0L Engine	Eight forward gears plus reverse	Rear-wheel drive or All-wheel drive

Model Transmission Traction
2.9L Engine	Eight forward gears plus reverse	Rear

BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.0L Engine Disc Disc Electric

Model	Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake
2.9L Engine	Disc or Carbon Ceramic disc	Disc or Carbon Ceramic disc	Electric

CAUTION!

□ Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
☐ To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear
2.0L Engine and 2.9L Engine	Independent wheel double-wishbone suspension	Independent wheel with multi-link system

STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
2.0L Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m)	Rack and pinion with electric power steering

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
2.9L Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m)	Rack and pinion with electric power steering

DIMENSIONS — 2.0L ENGINE

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

AFrontOverhang	BWheelbase	CRearOverhang	DOverallLength	EOverallHeight	FFront Track	GRear Track	HOverallWidth (Incl.Mirrors)	IOverallWidth(Excl.Mirrors)
31.30Inches	111.02Inches	40.47Inches	182.80Inches	56.54 Inches ^1 57.09 Inches ^2	61.30 Inches ^1 61.38 Inches ^2	63.98 Inches ^1 63.15 Inches ^2	79.69Inches	73.23Inches

1. RWD models
2. AWD models

Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

DIMENSIONS — 2.9L Engine

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

A Front Overhang	B Wheelbase	C Rear Overhang	D Overall Length	E Overall Height	F Front Track	G Rear Track	H Overall Width (Incl. Mirrors)	I Overall Width (Excl. Mirrors)
31.30 Inches	111.02 Inches	40.31 Inches	182.64 Inches	56.14 Inches	61.22 Inches	63.27 Inches	79.69 Inches	73.74 Inches

WEIGHTS — 2.0L ENGINE

Weights (lbs) AWD RWD
Unloaded weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment)	3,622 3,522
Payload including the driver ^1	905 905
Maximum permitted loads ^2	155 155
Front axle 2,205 2,205
Rear axle 2,646 2,646
Total 4,723 4,612

1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

WEIGHTS — 2.9L ENGINE

Weights (lbs) 2.9L Engine
Unloaded weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment)	3,820
Payload including the driver1	905
Maximum permitted loads2	155
Front axle 2,260
Rear axle 2,646
Total 4,774

1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

These engines are designed to meet all emission regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using

high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is recommended in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and not covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA US LLC and not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. FCA US LLC recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Vertical sequence of icons representing transportation, security, vehicle, and related services with a red icon highlighting a gear and document.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in mini-mizing engine and fuel system

deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance:

☐ The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

☐ An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

☐ The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of FCA US LLC and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

FLUID CAPACITIES

2.0L Engine

	US Metric
Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters
Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters
Engine oil sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters
Automatic transmission	9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts (AWD Model)	9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters (AWD Model)
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV - -
RDU 230-LSD differential - if equipped 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
RDU 210/215-LSD differential - if equipped	1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters
AWD System FAD transfer case	0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters
AWD System Transfer Case	0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

Vertical sequence of gray icons representing various activities such as transportation, weather, and inspection, with a red icon highlighting key functions.

2.9L V6 Engine

	US Metric
Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters
Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters
Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters
Automatic transmission - -
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195	--
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV	Main body: 0.8 QuartsLeft TV: 0.5 QuartsRight TV: 0.6 Quarts	Main body: 0.8 LitersLeft TV: 0.5 LitersRight TV: 0.6 Liters
RDU 230-LSD differential	--
RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped)	--
RDU 210/215-LSD differential	--

ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

2.0L Engine

Features Specification Replacement interval
Mopar ILSAC GF-6/API Certified SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil	FCA Material Standards MS-13340 According to the Maintenance Plan
CAUTION!
Using lubricants that do not meet the recommended ILSAC GF-6/API or equivalent oil specifications can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

2.9L Engine

Features Specification Replacement interval
5W-40	FPT 9.55535-GH2	According to the Maintenance Plan
ACEA C3	MS-12991
API SN

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

2.0L Engine

Use Features Specification Applications
Lubricants and greases	ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF - Automatic transmission
	SAE 75W-85 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9		Differential and reduction units RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD
	SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic lubricant	FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case
	SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE
Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes
Engine coolant	CUNA NC 956-16 ASTMD3306	MS.90032	Use rate 50% Not mixable with different formulation products.1
Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043			To be used diluted or undiluted in windshield washer/wiper systems
HVAC R1234yf	-	-

1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

2.9L Engine

Use Features Specification Applications
Lubricants and greases	ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF - Automatic transmission
	SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 Synthetic lubricant	FPW9.55550-DA8	Differential and reduction units RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine
Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes
Engine coolant	CUNA NC 956-16 ASTMD3306	MS.90032	Use rate 50% Not mixable with different formulation products.1
Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043			To be used diluted or undiluted in windshield washer/wiper systems
HVAC R1234yf - -

1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

PERFORMANCE — 2.0L ENGINE

Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Models Maximum speed mph		Acceleration from 0-60 mph/0-100 km/h sec.
RWD	149 *	5.5 *
AWD	149 *	5.1 *

*Based on FCA US LLC testing.

PERFORMANCE — 2.9L ENGINE

Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Maximum speed mph	Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec.
191 *	3.8 *

*Based on FCA US LLC testing.

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history, as this can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.

Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center should include the following information:

□ Owner's name and address
□ Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and office)
□ Authorized dealer name
□ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
□ Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] (English)

Phone: [phone] (French)

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-877-230-0563 English / 1-877-515-9112 French).

FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

Vertical sequence of icons representing various activities such as car, phone, road, and search with a red magnifying glass icon.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information available online, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

Use this QR code to access your digital experience.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components and is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.

To access your Owner's Information online, visit

□ alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual(US)
□ alfaromeo.ca/fr/owners/owners-service-manual(Canada)

To order a hard copy of your Owner's Information, visit:

□ www.techauthority.com (US)

Or

Call Tech Authority toll free at:

□ 1-800-890-4038 (US)
□ 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

RF Exposure Requirements

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, the device must be installed and operated to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Accessories Purchased By The Owner...... 3

Active Blind Spot Assist 147

Active Safety Systems....141

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System .....142

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) 105

Off 109

On....109

Additives, Fuel 264

Adjust

Forward....29,32

Rearward 29,32

Air Bag....166

Air Bag Operation....168

Air Bag Warning Light 165

Driver Knee Air Bag....168

Enhanced Accident Response .....172, 203

Event Data Recorder (EDR)......203

Front Air Bag....166

If Deployment Occurs ......171

Knee Impact Bolsters 168

Maintaining Your Air Bag System......174

Maintenance 174

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.....166

Side Air Bags 169

Transporting Pets....187

Air Bag Light 165, 187

Air Pressure

Tires 241

INDEX

Alarm

Security Alarm.... 21

Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) 102

Alfa DNA System 99

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System 141

Anti-Lock Warning Light.... 75

Automatic Door Locks 26

Automatic Headlights 42

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)...... 49

Automatic Transmission.... 92

Auxiliary Driving Systems 144

B

Back-Up Camera 134

Battery 78,215

Charging System Light 78

Battery Recharging 215

Belts, Seat 187

Blind Spot Monitoring.... 145

Bodywork (Cleaning And Maintenance) ...252

B-Pillar Location.... 237

Brake System

Warning Light....73, 74

Brakes 258

Brake Fluid Level 214

Bulbs, Light 188

C

Camera, Rear 134

Carbon Monoxide Warning.... 189

Cargo Tie-Downs 64

Certification Label 136

Chart, Tire Sizing.... 234

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light) 85

Checking Levels.... 211, 212

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety...... 187

Checks, Safety 187

Child Restraint 174

Child Restraints

Booster Seats.... 177

Child Seat Installation.... 185

How To Stow An unused

ALR Seat Belt 182

Infant And Child Restraints.... 176

LATCH Positions 179

Lower Anchors And Tethers For

Children 179

Older Children And Child Restraints .... 176

Seating Positions.... 178

Using The Top Tether Anchorage ..... 186

Clean Air Gasoline 263

Cleaning

Wheels 246

Climate Control.... 48, 54

Contract, Service 271

Cruise Control (Speed Control)...... 105

Customer Assistance 270

D

Daytime Running Lights....42

Deck Lid

Power Release....63

Defroster, Windshield 187

Dimmer Switch

Headlight 46

Door Ajar 78, 79

Door Ajar Light.... 78, 79

Door Locks

Automatic 26

Door Opener, Garage 38

Drive Train Control (DTC) System......142

Driving Modes 99

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System...142

E

Electric Park Brake....90

Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) 105

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System 142

Electronic Throttle Control Warning

Light 78

Emergency

In Case Of 190, 194

SOS Emergency Call 190

Emergency, In Case Of

Jump Starting 198

Overheating....200

Tow Hooks 202

Towing....201

Emission Control System Maintenance..... 85

Engine 256

Block Heater....89

Engine Coolant Level 214

Exhaust Gas Caution 189

Fuel Requirements 263

Jump Starting 199

Overheating....200

Engine Compartment......211

Engine Compartment (Washing) ......253

Engine Oil

Level Check....213

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature 172, 203

Ethanol 263

Exhaust Gas Cautions 189

Exhaust System 189

Exterior Lights 42, 188, 231

F

Flashers

Turn Signals 77,188

Fluid Leaks 188

Fog Lights, Rear 44

Forward Collision Warning 151

Fuel

Additives....264

Clean Air 263

Ethanol 263

Light....79

Materials Added 264

Methanol.... 263

Fuses 223, 224

G

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) 38

Gasoline, Clean Air 263

Gasoline, Reformulated 263

Gauges

Engine Oil Temperature 67

Fuel....68

Speedometer 68

Tachometer....67

Glove Compartment Storage ....55

GVWR 137

H

Hazard Warning Flashers.... 190

Head Restraints....35

Head Rests 35

Headlights....42

Automatic....42

Delay 43

High Beam 42

Switch 42

Headlights (Cleaning).... 253

Heated Mirrors....38

Heated Seats ....33, 34

Heated Steering Wheel 27

Heater, Engine Block....89

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 143

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)....38

Hood

Closing 62

Opening......62

Hood Release 62

|

Ignition 19

Switch 19

Immobilizer (Sentry Key)......18

In Case Of Emergency 190

Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices...... 3

Instrument Cluster

Descriptions....77

Display 68

Instrument Panel Features ....66
Interior And Instrument Lights 45, 46
Interior Lights 44, 232
Interiors (Cleaning)......253
Internal Equipment 55

J Jump Starting 198

K
Keyless Enter-N-Go .... 24 Passive Entry.... 24
Keys 16

L Lane Change And Turn Signals .... 44
Lane Change Assist.... 44
LaneSense....128
Lap/Shoulder Belts....160
Latches 188

Leaks, Fluid ....188

Life Of Tires....245

Light Bulbs....188 Types Of Bulbs....229

Lights ....188 Air Bag ....165, 187

Ambient .... 45 Brake Warning .... 73, 74

Courtesy/Reading....45, 46 Daytime Running....42

Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator 78

Exterior 42,188
Fog....44
Hazard Warning Flasher.... 190
High Beam/Low Beam Select...... 42
Interior......44
Low Fuel 79
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine).... 77
Park 43,77
Seat Belt Reminder 75
Turn Signals 44, 77, 188
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions....77, 78
Loading Vehicle....136
Tires.... 237
Locks
Automatic Door 26
Child Protection 26

M Maintenance 61
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)....77
Manual Service....272
Memory Feature (Memory Seats).... 28
Memory Seat.... 28
Methanol 263
Mirrors Automatic Dimming.... 36
Electric Powered.... 37
Exterior Folding.... 37
Heated.... 38
Rearview.... 36
Vanity.... 232

0 Occupant Restraints.... 159
Oil Pressure Light 79
Oil, Engine Pressure Warning Light....79
Onboard Diagnostic System 84
Opener, Garage Door (Homelink)....38
Operator Manual Owner's Manual.... 272

P Paintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance) 252
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System 143
ParkSense System 125
Passive Entry 24
Performance (Top Speed).... 269
Pets 187
Pinch Protection ....61
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .... 237

Power Deck Lid Release ....63 Seats ....32 Sunroof ....60

Power Seats Forward....29, 32 Rearward....29, 32 Recline....29, 32

Power Supply 257

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 163

Pretensioners Seat Belts 164

Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity.... 250

R

Radial Ply Tires....244

Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ..... 4

Rear Camera 134

Rear Cross Path ....145

Reformulated Gasoline....263

Refueling Procedure 135

Refueling The Vehicle 135

Refuelling....265

Reminder, Seat Belt....160

Remote Control

Starting System...... 20

Remote Keyless Entry.... 16

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode 21

Remote Starting System.... 20, 86

Remote Trunk Release 63

Replacement Bulbs....228, 231, 232

Replacement Tires 245

Reporting Safety Defects......272

Restraints, Child....174

Rims And Tires 234

S

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ....187

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....188

Safety Defects, Reporting....272

Safety Information, Tire 234

Safety Tips 187

Safety, Exhaust Gas 189

Saving Fuel 138

Scheduled Servicing 204

Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) 205

Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine Versions) ...... 208

Seat Belt Reminder 75

Seat Belts 159, 187

Child Restraints ....174

Energy Management Feature 164

Front Seat 159, 160

Inspection 187

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting......162

Lap/Shoulder Belts 160

Pregnant Women.... 163

Pretensioners.... 164

Rear Seat 160

Reminder...... 160

Seat Belt Pretensioner 164

Untwisting Procedure 162

Seats....29, 32

Adjustment....29, 32

Head Restraints.... 35

Heated....33, 34

Power 32

Security Alarm.... 21

Service Assistance.... 270

Service Contract.... 271

Service Manuals 272

Servicing Procedures.... 217

Shoulder Belts.... 160

Signals, Turn 77, 188

Snow Chains 248

Snow Tires....247

Spare Tires.... 246

Speed Control

Accel/Decel 106, 107

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) 110

Cancel 107

Distance Setting (ACC Only)...... 111

Resume.... 107

Set 106

Speed Control (Cruise Control).... 105

Starting

Button 19

Cold Weather....87

Remote 20

Starting The Engine....86

Steering

Tilt Column....26

Wheel, Heated....27

Wheel, Tilt 26

Steering System 259

Stop/Start System.... 102

Storage

Console 56

Glove Compartment....55

Suggestions For Driving 138

Sun Roof 60, 61

Sun Visor....37

Supplemental Restraint System –

Air Bag.... 166

Suspension 259

System, Remote Starting .....20

Vertical sequence of icons representing various vehicle-related functions such as parking, emergency response, and search.

T

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo 64

Tire And Loading Information Placard .....237

Tire Markings....234

Tire Safety Information 234

Tire Service Kit 194

Tires 188, 241, 246, 250

Aging (Life Of Tires)......245

Air Pressure 241

Flat Changing 194

General Information....241, 246

High Speed 242

Inflation Pressure....241

Life Of Tires 245

Load Capacity....237, 238

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).... 75, 76

Quality Grading......250

Radial....244

Replacement....245

Safety....234, 241

Sizes 234

Snow Tires 247

Spare Tires 246

Spinning....244

Tread Wear Indicators 244

Tow Hooks 202

Towing

Disabled Vehicle 201

Towing Trailers 138

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System).... 156

Traction Control System (TCS) 144

Transmission.... 258

Transporting Animals.... 139

Transporting Passengers 139

Transporting Pets.... 187

Tread Wear Indicators 244

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid).... 63

Turn Signals ....44, 77

U

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features...... 24

Passive Entry Programming...... 24

Uniform Tire Quality Grades....250

Universal Transmitter 38

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt 162

Use Of The Owner's Manual....5

V

Vehicle Changes/Alterations ....3

Vehicle Identification Number 255

Vehicle Loading....136, 238

W

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Descriptions)....75

Warranty Information 272

WARRANTY INFORMATION 272

Washer Fluid For Windshield/

Headlights.... 214

Washers, Windshield....47

Weights 262

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care 246

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.... 246

Wheels And Tires.... 234

Wind Buffeting 59

Windows (Cleaning).... 253

Windshield Defroster 187

Windshield Washers....47

Windshield Wiper

Replacing Blades 219

Windshield Wipers....46

Wipers, Intermittent ....47

Wipers, Rain Sensitive ....47

The driver's primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver's responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (U.S.), www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

ALFA ROMEO

Whether it's providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle's heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you'll find the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store ^® or Google Play ^® Store and enter the search keyword "Alfa Romeo" (U.S. residents only).

U. S.

alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual

Canada

alfaromeo.ca/en/owners/owners-service-manual

©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.